1 |
GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2001-03-15 |
2 |
Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
3 |
See the end for copying conditions. |
4 |
|
5 |
Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org. |
6 |
For older news, see the file ONEWS |
7 |
|
8 |
Temporary note: |
9 |
+++ indicates that the appropriate manual has already been updated. |
10 |
--- means no change in the manuals is called for. |
11 |
When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- |
12 |
so we will look at it and add it to the manual. |
13 |
|
14 |
|
15 |
* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.4 |
16 |
|
17 |
--- |
18 |
** Emacs can now be built without sound support. |
19 |
|
20 |
** The `emacsserver' program has been removed, replaced with elisp code. |
21 |
|
22 |
--- |
23 |
** Emacs now supports new configure options `--program-prefix', |
24 |
`--program-suffix' and `--program-transform-name' that affect the names of |
25 |
installed programs. |
26 |
|
27 |
--- |
28 |
** By default, Emacs now uses a setgid helper program to update game |
29 |
scores. The directory ${localstatedir}/games/emacs is the normal |
30 |
place for game scores to be stored. This may be controlled by the |
31 |
configure option `--with-game-dir'. The specific user that Emacs uses |
32 |
to own the game scores is controlled by `--with-game-user'. If access |
33 |
to a game user is not available, then scores will be stored separately |
34 |
in each user's home directory. |
35 |
|
36 |
--- |
37 |
** Leim is now part of the Emacs distribution. |
38 |
You no longer need to download a separate tarball in order to build |
39 |
Emacs with Leim. |
40 |
|
41 |
--- |
42 |
** Support for AIX 5.1 was added. |
43 |
|
44 |
--- |
45 |
** Support for FreeBSD/Alpha has been added. |
46 |
|
47 |
--- |
48 |
** Support for BSD/OS 5.0 was added. |
49 |
|
50 |
--- |
51 |
** Support for GNU/Linux systems on S390 machines was added. |
52 |
|
53 |
--- |
54 |
** Support for MacOS X was added. |
55 |
See the files mac/README and mac/INSTALL for build instructions. |
56 |
|
57 |
--- |
58 |
** Support for GNU/Linux systems on X86-64 machines was added. |
59 |
|
60 |
* Changes in Emacs 21.4 |
61 |
|
62 |
** MH-E changes. |
63 |
|
64 |
Upgraded to mh-e version 6.1.1. There have been major changes since |
65 |
version 5.0.2; see MH-E-NEWS for details. |
66 |
|
67 |
+++ |
68 |
** The `emacsclient' understand the options `--eval' and `--display' |
69 |
which tell Emacs resp. to evaluate the given elisp expressions and |
70 |
to use the given display when visiting files. |
71 |
|
72 |
+++ |
73 |
** The mode line position information now comes before the major mode. |
74 |
When the file is maintained under version control, that information |
75 |
appears between the position information and the major mode. |
76 |
|
77 |
** C-x s (save-some-buffers) now offers an option `d' to diff a buffer |
78 |
against its file, so you can see what changes you would be saving. |
79 |
|
80 |
+++ |
81 |
** You can now customize the use of window fringes. To control this |
82 |
for all frames, use M-x fringe-mode or the Show/Hide submenu of the |
83 |
top-level Options menu, or customize the `fringe-mode' variable. To |
84 |
control this for a specific frame, use the command M-x |
85 |
set-fringe-style. |
86 |
|
87 |
+++ |
88 |
** There is a new user option `mail-default-directory' that allows you |
89 |
to specify the value of `default-directory' for mail buffers. This |
90 |
directory is used for auto-save files of mail buffers. It defaults to |
91 |
"~/". |
92 |
|
93 |
+++ |
94 |
** When you are root, and you visit a file whose modes specify |
95 |
read-only, the Emacs buffer is now read-only too. Type C-x C-q if you |
96 |
want to make the buffer writable. (As root, you will in fact be able |
97 |
to alter the file.) |
98 |
|
99 |
** The new command `revert-buffer-with-coding-system' (C-x RET r) |
100 |
revisits the current file using a coding system that you specify. |
101 |
|
102 |
--- |
103 |
** `ps-print' can now print Unicode characters. |
104 |
|
105 |
Printing text with characters from the mule-unicode-* sets works with |
106 |
ps-print, provided that you have installed the appropriate BDF fonts. |
107 |
See the file INSTALL for URLs where you can find these fonts. |
108 |
|
109 |
--- |
110 |
** The new options `buffers-menu-show-directories' and |
111 |
`buffers-menu-show-status' let you control how buffers are displayed |
112 |
in the menu dropped down when you click "Buffers" from the menu bar. |
113 |
|
114 |
`buffers-menu-show-directories' controls whether the menu displays |
115 |
leading directories as part of the file name visited by the buffer. |
116 |
If its value is `unless-uniquify', the default, directories will be |
117 |
shown unless uniquify-buffer-name-style' is non-nil. The value of nil |
118 |
and t turn the display of directories off and on, respectively. |
119 |
|
120 |
`buffers-menu-show-status' controls whether the Buffers menu includes |
121 |
the modified and read-only status of the buffers. By default it is |
122 |
t, and the status is shown. |
123 |
|
124 |
Setting these variables directly does not take effect until next time |
125 |
the Buffers menu is regenerated. |
126 |
|
127 |
+++ |
128 |
** The commands M-x customize-face and M-x customize-face-other-window |
129 |
now look at the character after point. If a face or faces are |
130 |
specified for that character, the commands by default customize those |
131 |
faces. |
132 |
|
133 |
** New language environments: French, Cyrillic-KOI8-U, Windows-1251, |
134 |
Cyrillic-KOI8-T, Bulgarian, Belarusian, Ukrainian, UTF-8, |
135 |
Windows-1255, Welsh, Latin-7, Lithuanian, Latvian. |
136 |
|
137 |
--- |
138 |
** New input methods: latin-alt-postfix, latin-postfix, latin-prefix, |
139 |
ukrainian-computer, belarusian, bulgarian-bds, russian-computer, |
140 |
vietnamese-telex, lithuanian-numeric, lithuanian-keyboard, |
141 |
latvian-keyboard, welsh, georgian, rfc1345, ucs, sgml, |
142 |
bulgarian-phonetic, dutch. |
143 |
|
144 |
--- |
145 |
** A new coding system `euc-tw' has been added for traditional Chinese |
146 |
in CNS encoding; it accepts both Big 5 and CNS as input; on saving, |
147 |
Big 5 is then converted to CNS. |
148 |
|
149 |
--- |
150 |
** Many new coding systems are available by loading the `code-pages' |
151 |
library. These include complete versions of most of those in |
152 |
codepage.el, based Unicode mappings. |
153 |
|
154 |
** The utf-8 coding system has been enhanced. Untranslatable utf-8 |
155 |
sequences (mostly representing CJK characters) are composed into |
156 |
single quasi-characters. By loading the library utf-8-subst, you can |
157 |
arrange to translate many utf-8 CJK character sequences into real |
158 |
Emacs characters in a similar way to the Mule-UCS system. The utf-8 |
159 |
coding system will now encode characters from most of Emacs's |
160 |
one-dimensional internal charsets, specifically the ISO-8859 ones. |
161 |
|
162 |
** New command `ucs-insert' inserts a character specified by its |
163 |
Unicode. |
164 |
|
165 |
+++ |
166 |
** Limited support for character unification has been added. |
167 |
Emacs now knows how to translate Latin-N chars between their charset |
168 |
and some other Latin-N charset or Unicode. By default this |
169 |
translation will happen automatically on encoding. Quail input |
170 |
methods use the translations to make the input conformant with the |
171 |
encoding of the buffer in which it's being used where possible. |
172 |
|
173 |
You can force a more complete unification with the user option |
174 |
unify-8859-on-decoding-mode. That maps all the Latin-N character sets |
175 |
into Unicode characters (from the latin-iso8859-1 and |
176 |
mule-unicode-0100-24ff charsets) on decoding. |
177 |
|
178 |
** There is support for decoding Greek and Cyrillic characters into |
179 |
either Unicode (the mule-unicode charsets) or the iso-8859 charsets, |
180 |
when possible. The latter are more space-efficient. This is |
181 |
controlled by user option utf-8-fragment-on-decoding. |
182 |
|
183 |
--- |
184 |
** The scrollbar under LessTif or Motif has a smoother drag-scrolling. |
185 |
On the other hand, the size of the thumb does not represent the actual |
186 |
amount of text shown any more (only a crude approximation of it). |
187 |
|
188 |
+++ |
189 |
** Emacs can produce an underscore-like (horizontal bar) cursor. |
190 |
The underscore cursor is set by putting `(cursor-type . hbar)' in |
191 |
default-frame-alist. It supports variable heights, like the `bar' |
192 |
cursor does. |
193 |
|
194 |
** Filesets are collections of files. You can define a fileset in |
195 |
various ways, such as based on a directory tree or based on |
196 |
program files that include other program files. |
197 |
|
198 |
Once you have defined a fileset, you can perform various operations on |
199 |
all the files in it, such as visiting them or searching and replacing |
200 |
in them. |
201 |
|
202 |
--- |
203 |
** PO translation files are decoded according to their MIME headers |
204 |
when Emacs visits them. |
205 |
|
206 |
--- |
207 |
** The game `mpuz' is enhanced. |
208 |
|
209 |
`mpuz' now allows the 2nd factor not to have two identical digits. By |
210 |
default, all trivial operations involving whole lines are performed |
211 |
automatically. The game uses faces for better visual feedback. |
212 |
|
213 |
+++ |
214 |
** On X, MS Windows, and Mac OS, the blinking cursor's "off" state is |
215 |
now shown as a hollow box or a thin bar. However, you can control how |
216 |
it blinks off by setting the variable `blink-cursor-alist'. |
217 |
|
218 |
|
219 |
+++ |
220 |
** Emacs now supports compound-text Extended Segments in X selections. |
221 |
|
222 |
Some versions of X, notably XFree86, use Extended Segments to encode |
223 |
in X selections characters that belong to character sets which are not |
224 |
part of the list of approved standard encodings defined by the ICCCM |
225 |
spec. Examples of such non-standard encodings include ISO 8859-14, ISO |
226 |
8859-15, KOI8-R, and BIG5. The new coding system |
227 |
`compound-text-with-extensions' supports these extensions, and is now |
228 |
used by default for encoding and decoding X selections. If you don't |
229 |
want this support, set `selection-coding-system' to `compound-text'. |
230 |
|
231 |
+++ |
232 |
** The parameters of automatic hscrolling can now be customized. |
233 |
The variable `hscroll-margin' determines how many columns away from |
234 |
the window edge point is allowed to get before automatic hscrolling |
235 |
will horizontally scroll the window. The default value is 5. |
236 |
|
237 |
The variable `hscroll-step' determines how many columns automatic |
238 |
hscrolling will scroll the window when point gets too close to the |
239 |
window edge. If its value is zero, the default, Emacs scrolls the |
240 |
window so as to center point. If its value is an integer, it says how |
241 |
many columns to scroll. If the value is a floating-point number, it |
242 |
gives the fraction of the window's width to scroll the window. |
243 |
|
244 |
The variable `automatic-hscrolling' was renamed to |
245 |
`auto-hscroll-mode'. The old name is still available as an alias. |
246 |
|
247 |
+++ |
248 |
** The user option `tex-start-options-string' has been replaced |
249 |
by two new user options: `tex-start-options', which should hold |
250 |
command-line options to feed to TeX, and `tex-start-commands' which should hold |
251 |
TeX commands to use at startup. |
252 |
|
253 |
+++ |
254 |
** New display feature: focus follows mouse. If you set the variable |
255 |
mouse-autoselect-window to non-nil value, moving the mouse to a different |
256 |
Emacs window will select that window (minibuffer window can be selected |
257 |
only when it is active). The default is nil, so that this feature is not |
258 |
enabled. |
259 |
|
260 |
+++ |
261 |
** The new command `describe-char' (C-u C-x =) pops up a buffer with |
262 |
description various information about a character, including its |
263 |
encodings and syntax, its text properties, overlays, and widgets at |
264 |
point. You can get more information about some of them, by clicking |
265 |
on mouse-sensitive areas or moving there and pressing RET. |
266 |
|
267 |
+++ |
268 |
** The new command `multi-occur' is just like `occur', except it can |
269 |
search multiple buffers. There is also a new command |
270 |
`multi-occur-by-filename-regexp' which allows you to specify the |
271 |
buffers to search by their filename. Internally, Occur mode has been |
272 |
rewritten, and now uses font-lock, among other changes. |
273 |
|
274 |
+++ |
275 |
** Emacs normally highlights mouse sensitive text whenever the mouse |
276 |
is over the text. By setting the new variable `mouse-highlight', you |
277 |
can optionally enable mouse highlighting only after you move the |
278 |
mouse, so that highlighting disappears when you press a key. You can |
279 |
also disable mouse highlighting. |
280 |
|
281 |
+++ |
282 |
** font-lock: in modes like C and Lisp where the fontification assumes that |
283 |
an open-paren in column 0 is always outside of any string or comment, |
284 |
font-lock now highlights any such open-paren-in-column-zero in bold-red |
285 |
if it is inside a string or a comment, to indicate that it can cause |
286 |
trouble with fontification and/or indentation. |
287 |
|
288 |
+++ |
289 |
** There's a new face `minibuffer-prompt'. |
290 |
Emacs adds this face to the list of text properties stored in the |
291 |
variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', which is used to display the |
292 |
prompt string. |
293 |
|
294 |
+++ |
295 |
** The new face `mode-line-inactive' is used to display the mode line |
296 |
of non-selected windows. The `mode-line' face is now used to display |
297 |
the mode line of the currently selected window. |
298 |
|
299 |
The new variable `mode-line-in-non-selected-windows' controls whether |
300 |
the `mode-line-inactive' face is used. |
301 |
|
302 |
--- |
303 |
** A menu item "Show/Hide" was added to the top-level menu "Options". |
304 |
This menu allows you to turn various display features on and off (such |
305 |
as the fringes, the tool bar, the speedbar, and the menu bar itself). |
306 |
You can also move the vertical scroll bar to either side here or turn |
307 |
it off completely. There is also a menu-item to toggle displaying of |
308 |
current date and time, current line and column number in the |
309 |
mode-line. |
310 |
|
311 |
--- |
312 |
** Speedbar has moved from the "Tools" top level menu to "Show/Hide". |
313 |
|
314 |
+++ |
315 |
** Emacs can now indicate in the mode-line the presence of new e-mails |
316 |
in a directory or in a file. See the documentation of the user option |
317 |
`display-time-mail-directory'. |
318 |
|
319 |
+++ |
320 |
** The new option `Info-scroll-prefer-subnodes' causes Info to behave |
321 |
like the stand-alone Info reader (from the GNU Texinfo package) as far |
322 |
as motion between nodes and their subnodes is concerned. If it is t |
323 |
(the default), Emacs behaves as before when you type SPC in a menu: it |
324 |
visits the subnode pointed to by the first menu entry. If this option |
325 |
is nil, SPC scrolls to the end of the current node, and only then goes |
326 |
to the first menu item, like the stand-alone reader does. |
327 |
|
328 |
This change was already in Emacs 21.1, but wasn't advertised in the |
329 |
NEWS. |
330 |
|
331 |
--- |
332 |
** LDAP support now defaults to ldapsearch from OpenLDAP version 2. |
333 |
|
334 |
+++ |
335 |
** You can now disable pc-selection-mode after enabling it. |
336 |
M-x pc-selection-mode behaves like a proper minor mode, and with no |
337 |
argument it toggles the mode. |
338 |
|
339 |
Turning off PC-Selection mode restores the global key bindings |
340 |
that were replaced by turning on the mode. |
341 |
|
342 |
+++ |
343 |
** Emacs now displays a splash screen by default even if command-line |
344 |
arguments were given. The new command-line option --no-splash |
345 |
disables the splash screen; see also the variable |
346 |
`inhibit-startup-message' (which is also aliased as |
347 |
`inhibit-splash-screen'). |
348 |
|
349 |
** Changes in support of colors on character terminals |
350 |
|
351 |
+++ |
352 |
*** The new command-line option --color=MODE lets you specify a standard |
353 |
mode for a tty color support. It is meant to be used on character |
354 |
terminals whose capabilities are not set correctly in the terminal |
355 |
database, or with terminal emulators which support colors, but don't |
356 |
set the TERM environment variable to a name of a color-capable |
357 |
terminal. "emacs --color" uses the same color commands as GNU `ls' |
358 |
when invoked with "ls --color", so if your terminal can support colors |
359 |
in "ls --color", it will support "emacs --color" as well. See the |
360 |
user manual for the possible values of the MODE parameter. |
361 |
|
362 |
--- |
363 |
*** Emacs now supports several character terminals which provide more |
364 |
than 8 colors. For example, for `xterm', 16-color, 88-color, and |
365 |
256-color modes are supported. Emacs automatically notes at startup |
366 |
the extended number of colors, and defines the appropriate entries for |
367 |
all of these colors. |
368 |
|
369 |
--- |
370 |
*** There's a new support for colors on `rxvt' terminal emulator. |
371 |
|
372 |
+++ |
373 |
** Emacs can now be invoked in full-screen mode on a windowed display. |
374 |
|
375 |
When Emacs is invoked on a window system, the new command-line options |
376 |
`--fullwidth', `--fullheight', and `--fullscreen' produce a frame |
377 |
whose width, height, or both width and height take up the entire |
378 |
screen size. (For now, this does not work with some window managers.) |
379 |
|
380 |
--- |
381 |
** Info-index offers completion. |
382 |
|
383 |
--- |
384 |
** shell-mode now supports programmable completion using `pcomplete'. |
385 |
|
386 |
--- |
387 |
** Emacs now tries to set up buffer coding systems for HTML/XML files |
388 |
automatically. |
389 |
|
390 |
+++ |
391 |
** The new command `comint-input-previous-argument' in comint-derived |
392 |
modes (shell-mode etc) inserts arguments from previous command lines, |
393 |
like bash's `ESC .' binding. It is bound by default to `C-c .', but |
394 |
otherwise behaves quite similarly to the bash version. |
395 |
|
396 |
+++ |
397 |
** Changes in C-h bindings: |
398 |
|
399 |
C-h e displays the *Messages* buffer. |
400 |
|
401 |
C-h followed by a control character is used for displaying files |
402 |
that do not change: |
403 |
|
404 |
C-h C-f displays the FAQ. |
405 |
C-h C-e displays the PROBLEMS file. |
406 |
|
407 |
The info-search bindings on C-h C-f, C-h C-k and C-h C-i |
408 |
have been moved to C-h F, C-h K and C-h S. |
409 |
|
410 |
C-h c, C-h k, C-h w, and C-h f now handle remapped interactive commands. |
411 |
|
412 |
- C-h c and C-h k report the actual command (after possible remapping) |
413 |
run by the key sequence. |
414 |
|
415 |
- C-h w and C-h f on a command which has been remapped now report the |
416 |
command it is remapped to, and the keys which can be used to run |
417 |
that command. |
418 |
|
419 |
For example, if C-k is bound to kill-line, and kill-line is remapped |
420 |
to new-kill-line, these commands now report: |
421 |
|
422 |
- C-h c and C-h k C-k reports: |
423 |
C-k runs the command new-kill-line |
424 |
|
425 |
- C-h w and C-h f kill-line reports: |
426 |
kill-line is remapped to new-kill-line which is on C-k, <deleteline> |
427 |
|
428 |
- C-h w and C-h f new-kill-line reports: |
429 |
new-kill-line is on C-k |
430 |
|
431 |
+++ |
432 |
** C-w in incremental search now grabs either a character or a word, |
433 |
making the decision in a heuristic way. This new job is done by the |
434 |
command `isearch-yank-word-or-char'. To restore the old behavior, |
435 |
bind C-w to `isearch-yank-word' in `isearch-mode-map'. |
436 |
|
437 |
+++ |
438 |
** Yanking text now discards certain text properties that can |
439 |
be inconvenient when you did not expect them. The variable |
440 |
`yank-excluded-properties' specifies which ones. Insertion |
441 |
of register contents and rectangles also discards these properties. |
442 |
|
443 |
+++ |
444 |
** Occur, Info, and comint-derived modes now support using |
445 |
M-x font-lock-mode to toggle fontification. The variable |
446 |
`Info-fontify' is no longer applicable; to disable fontification, |
447 |
remove `turn-on-font-lock' from `Info-mode-hook'. |
448 |
|
449 |
+++ |
450 |
** M-x grep now tries to avoid appending `/dev/null' to the command line |
451 |
by using GNU grep `-H' option instead. M-x grep will automatically |
452 |
detect whether this is possible or not the first time it is invoked. |
453 |
When `-H' is used, the grep command line supplied by the user is passed |
454 |
unchanged to the system to execute, which allows more complicated |
455 |
command lines to be used than was possible before. |
456 |
|
457 |
--- |
458 |
** The face-customization widget has been reworked to be less confusing. |
459 |
In particular, when you enable a face attribute using the corresponding |
460 |
check-box, there's no longer a redundant `*' option in value selection |
461 |
for that attribute; the values you can choose are only those which make |
462 |
sense for the attribute. When an attribute is de-selected by unchecking |
463 |
its check-box, then the (now ignored, but still present temporarily in |
464 |
case you re-select the attribute) value is hidden. |
465 |
|
466 |
+++ |
467 |
** When you set or reset a variable's value in a Customize buffer, |
468 |
the previous value becomes the "backup value" of the variable. |
469 |
You can go back to that backup value by selecting "Use Backup Value" |
470 |
under the "[State]" button. |
471 |
|
472 |
+++ |
473 |
** In GUD mode, when talking to GDB, C-x C-a C-j "jumps" the program |
474 |
counter to the specified source line (the one where point is). |
475 |
|
476 |
--- |
477 |
** GUD mode improvements for jdb: |
478 |
|
479 |
*** Search for source files using jdb classpath and class |
480 |
information. Fast startup since there is no need to scan all |
481 |
source files up front. There is also no need to create and maintain |
482 |
lists of source directories to scan. Look at `gud-jdb-use-classpath' |
483 |
and `gud-jdb-classpath' customization variables documentation. |
484 |
|
485 |
*** Supports the standard breakpoint (gud-break, gud-clear) |
486 |
set/clear operations from java source files under the classpath, stack |
487 |
traversal (gud-up, gud-down), and run until current stack finish |
488 |
(gud-finish). |
489 |
|
490 |
*** Supports new jdb (Java 1.2 and later) in addition to oldjdb |
491 |
(Java 1.1 jdb). |
492 |
|
493 |
*** The previous method of searching for source files has been |
494 |
preserved in case someone still wants/needs to use it. |
495 |
Set gud-jdb-use-classpath to nil. |
496 |
|
497 |
Added Customization Variables |
498 |
|
499 |
*** gud-jdb-command-name. What command line to use to invoke jdb. |
500 |
|
501 |
*** gud-jdb-use-classpath. Allows selection of java source file searching |
502 |
method: set to t for new method, nil to scan gud-jdb-directories for |
503 |
java sources (previous method). |
504 |
|
505 |
*** gud-jdb-directories. List of directories to scan and search for java |
506 |
classes using the original gud-jdb method (if gud-jdb-use-classpath |
507 |
is nil). |
508 |
|
509 |
Minor Improvements |
510 |
|
511 |
*** Do not allow debugger output history variable to grow without bounds. |
512 |
|
513 |
+++ |
514 |
** hide-ifdef-mode now uses overlays rather than selective-display |
515 |
to hide its text. This should be mostly transparent but slightly |
516 |
changes the behavior of motion commands line C-e and C-p. |
517 |
|
518 |
+++ |
519 |
** In Dired's ! command (dired-do-shell-command), `*' and `?' now |
520 |
control substitution of the file names only when they are surrounded |
521 |
by whitespace. This means you can now use them as shell wildcards |
522 |
too. If you want to use just plain `*' as a wildcard, type `*""'; the |
523 |
doublequotes make no difference in the shell, but they prevent |
524 |
special treatment in `dired-do-shell-command'. |
525 |
|
526 |
+++ |
527 |
** Dired's v command now runs external viewers to view certain |
528 |
types of files. The variable `dired-view-command-alist' controls |
529 |
what external viewers to use and when. |
530 |
|
531 |
+++ |
532 |
** Unquoted `$' in file names do not signal an error any more when |
533 |
the corresponding environment variable does not exist. |
534 |
Instead, the `$ENVVAR' text is left as is, so that `$$' quoting |
535 |
is only rarely needed. |
536 |
|
537 |
--- |
538 |
** jit-lock can now be delayed with `jit-lock-defer-time'. |
539 |
|
540 |
If this variable is non-nil, its value should be the amount of Emacs |
541 |
idle time in seconds to wait before starting fontification. For |
542 |
example, if you set `jit-lock-defer-time' to 0.25, fontification will |
543 |
only happen after 0.25s of idle time. |
544 |
|
545 |
+++ |
546 |
** Marking commands extend the region when invoked multiple times. If |
547 |
you hit M-C-SPC (mark-sexp), M-@ (mark-word), M-h (mark-paragraph), or |
548 |
C-M-h (mark-defun) repeatedly, the marked region will now be extended |
549 |
each time, so you can mark the next two sexps with M-C-SPC M-C-SPC, |
550 |
for example. This feature also works for mark-end-of-sentence, if you |
551 |
bind that to a key. |
552 |
|
553 |
+++ |
554 |
** Some commands do something special in Transient Mark mode when the |
555 |
mark is active--for instance, they limit their operation to the |
556 |
region. Even if you don't normally use Transient Mark mode, you might |
557 |
want to get this behavior from a particular command. There are two |
558 |
ways you can enable Transient Mark mode and activate the mark, for one |
559 |
command only. |
560 |
|
561 |
One method is to type C-SPC C-SPC; this enables Transient Mark mode |
562 |
and sets the mark at point. The other method is to type C-u C-x C-x. |
563 |
This enables Transient Mark mode temporarily but does not alter the |
564 |
mark or the region. |
565 |
|
566 |
After these commands, Transient Mark mode remains enabled until you |
567 |
deactivate the mark. That typically happens when you type a command |
568 |
that alters the buffer, but you can also deactivate the mark by typing |
569 |
C-g. |
570 |
|
571 |
+++ |
572 |
** A prefix argument is no longer required to repeat a jump to a |
573 |
previous mark, i.e. C-u C-SPC C-SPC C-SPC ... will cycle through the |
574 |
mark ring. Use C-u C-u C-SPC to set the mark immediately after a jump. |
575 |
|
576 |
+++ |
577 |
** In the *Occur* buffer, `o' switches to it in another window, and |
578 |
C-o displays the current line's occurrence in another window without |
579 |
switching to it. |
580 |
|
581 |
+++ |
582 |
** When you specify a frame size with --geometry, the size applies to |
583 |
all frames you create. A position specified with --geometry only |
584 |
affects the initial frame. |
585 |
|
586 |
+++ |
587 |
** M-h (mark-paragraph) now accepts a prefix arg. |
588 |
With positive arg, M-h marks the current and the following paragraphs; |
589 |
if the arg is negative, it marks the current and the preceding |
590 |
paragraphs. |
591 |
|
592 |
** In Dired, the w command now copies the current line's file name |
593 |
into the kill ring. |
594 |
|
595 |
+++ |
596 |
** The variables dired-free-space-program and dired-free-space-args |
597 |
have been renamed to directory-free-space-program and |
598 |
directory-free-space-args, and they now apply whenever Emacs puts a |
599 |
directory listing into a buffer. |
600 |
|
601 |
--- |
602 |
** mouse-wheels can now scroll a specific fraction of the window |
603 |
(rather than a fixed number of lines) and the scrolling is `progressive'. |
604 |
|
605 |
+++ |
606 |
** The keyboard-coding-system is now automatically set based on |
607 |
your current locale settings. If it turns out that your terminal |
608 |
does not support the encoding implied by your locale (for example, |
609 |
it inserts non-ASCII chars if you hit M-i), you will need to add |
610 |
|
611 |
(set-keyboard-coding-system nil) |
612 |
|
613 |
to your .emacs to revert to the old behavior. |
614 |
|
615 |
+++ |
616 |
** Emacs now reads the standard abbrevs file ~/.abbrev_defs |
617 |
automatically at startup, if it exists. When Emacs offers to save |
618 |
modified buffers, it saves the abbrevs too if they have changed. It |
619 |
can do this either silently or asking for confirmation first, |
620 |
according to the value of `save-abbrevs'. |
621 |
|
622 |
+++ |
623 |
** Display of hollow cursors now obeys the buffer-local value (if any) |
624 |
of `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' in the buffer that the cursor |
625 |
appears in. |
626 |
|
627 |
** The variable `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' can now be set to any |
628 |
of the recognized cursor types. |
629 |
|
630 |
+++ |
631 |
** The default values of `tooltip-delay' and `tooltip-hide-delay' |
632 |
were changed. |
633 |
|
634 |
--- |
635 |
** On terminals whose erase-char is ^H (Backspace), Emacs |
636 |
now uses normal-erase-is-backspace-mode. |
637 |
|
638 |
--- |
639 |
** The variable `auto-save-file-name-transforms' now has a third element that |
640 |
controls whether or not the function `make-auto-save-file-name' will |
641 |
attempt to construct a unique auto-save name (e.g. for remote files). |
642 |
|
643 |
+++ |
644 |
** Diary sexp entries can have custom marking in the calendar. |
645 |
Diary sexp functions which only apply to certain days (such as |
646 |
`diary-block' or `diary-cyclic' now take an optional parameter MARK, |
647 |
which is the name of a face or a single-character string indicating |
648 |
how to highlight the day in the calendar display. Specifying a |
649 |
single-character string as @var{mark} places the character next to the |
650 |
day in the calendar. Specifying a face highlights the day with that |
651 |
face. This lets you have different colors or markings for vacations, |
652 |
appointments, paydays or anything else using a sexp. |
653 |
|
654 |
** VC Changes |
655 |
|
656 |
*** The key C-x C-q no longer checks files in or out, it only changes |
657 |
the read-only state of the buffer (toggle-read-only). We made this |
658 |
change because we held a poll and found that many users were unhappy |
659 |
with the previous behavior. If you do prefer this behavior, you |
660 |
can bind `vc-toggle-read-only' to C-x C-q in your .emacs: |
661 |
|
662 |
(global-set-key "\C-x\C-q" 'vc-toggle-read-only) |
663 |
|
664 |
The function `vc-toggle-read-only' will continue to exist. |
665 |
|
666 |
+++ |
667 |
*** There is a new user option `vc-cvs-global-switches' that allows |
668 |
you to specify switches that are passed to any CVS command invoked |
669 |
by VC. These switches are used as "global options" for CVS, which |
670 |
means they are inserted before the command name. For example, this |
671 |
allows you to specify a compression level using the "-z#" option for |
672 |
CVS. |
673 |
|
674 |
** EDiff changes. |
675 |
|
676 |
+++ |
677 |
*** When comparing directories. |
678 |
Typing D brings up a buffer that lists the differences between the contents of |
679 |
directories. Now it is possible to use this buffer to copy the missing files |
680 |
from one directory to another. |
681 |
|
682 |
+++ |
683 |
*** When comparing files or buffers. |
684 |
Typing the = key now offers to perform the word-by-word comparison of the |
685 |
currently highlighted regions in an inferior Ediff session. If you answer 'n' |
686 |
then it reverts to the old behavior and asks the user to select regions for |
687 |
comparison. |
688 |
|
689 |
** The new command `ediff-backup' compares a file with its most recent |
690 |
backup using `ediff'. If you specify the name of a backup file, |
691 |
`ediff-backup' compares it with the file of which it is a backup. |
692 |
|
693 |
+++ |
694 |
** Etags changes. |
695 |
|
696 |
*** New regular expressions features |
697 |
|
698 |
**** New syntax for regular expressions, multi-line regular expressions. |
699 |
The syntax --ignore-case-regexp=/regex/ is now undocumented and retained |
700 |
only for backward compatibility. The new equivalent syntax is |
701 |
--regex=/regex/i. More generally, it is --regex=/TAGREGEX/TAGNAME/MODS, |
702 |
where `/TAGNAME' is optional, as usual, and MODS is a string of 0 or |
703 |
more characters among `i' (ignore case), `m' (multi-line) and `s' |
704 |
(single-line). The `m' and `s' modifiers behave as in Perl regular |
705 |
expressions: `m' allows regexps to match more than one line, while `s' |
706 |
(which implies `m') means that `.' matches newlines. The ability to |
707 |
span newlines allows writing of much more powerful regular expressions |
708 |
and rapid prototyping for tagging new languages. |
709 |
|
710 |
**** Regular expressions can use char escape sequences as in Gcc. |
711 |
The escaped character sequence \a, \b, \d, \e, \f, \n, \r, \t, \v, |
712 |
respectively, stand for the ASCII characters BEL, BS, DEL, ESC, FF, NL, |
713 |
CR, TAB, VT, |
714 |
|
715 |
**** Regular expressions can be bound to a given language. |
716 |
The syntax --regex={LANGUAGE}REGEX means that REGEX is used to make tags |
717 |
only for files of language LANGUAGE, and ignored otherwise. This is |
718 |
particularly useful when storing regexps in a file. |
719 |
|
720 |
**** Regular expressions can be read from a file. |
721 |
The --regex=@regexfile option means read the regexps from a file, one |
722 |
per line. Lines beginning with space or tab are ignored. |
723 |
|
724 |
*** New language parsing features |
725 |
|
726 |
**** The `::' qualifier triggers C++ parsing in C file. |
727 |
Previously, only the `template' and `class' keywords had this effect. |
728 |
|
729 |
**** In Perl, packages are tags. |
730 |
Subroutine tags are named from their package. You can jump to sub tags |
731 |
as you did before, by the sub name, or additionally by looking for |
732 |
package::sub. |
733 |
|
734 |
**** New language PHP. |
735 |
Tags are functions, classes and defines. |
736 |
If the --members option is specified to etags, tags are vars also. |
737 |
|
738 |
**** New language HTML. |
739 |
Title and h1, h2, h3 are tagged. Also, tags are generated when name= is |
740 |
used inside an anchor and whenever id= is used. |
741 |
|
742 |
**** New default keywords for TeX. |
743 |
The new keywords are def, newcommand, renewcommand, newenvironment and |
744 |
renewenvironment. |
745 |
|
746 |
**** In Makefiles, constants are tagged. |
747 |
If you want the old behavior instead, thus avoiding to increase the |
748 |
size of the tags file, use the --no-globals option. |
749 |
|
750 |
**** In Prolog, etags creates tags for rules in addition to predicates. |
751 |
|
752 |
*** Honour #line directives. |
753 |
When Etags parses an input file that contains C preprocessor's #line |
754 |
directives, it creates tags using the file name and line number |
755 |
specified in those directives. This is useful when dealing with code |
756 |
created from Cweb source files. When Etags tags the generated file, it |
757 |
writes tags pointing to the source file. |
758 |
|
759 |
*** New option --parse-stdin=FILE. |
760 |
This option is mostly useful when calling etags from programs. It can |
761 |
be used (only once) in place of a file name on the command line. Etags |
762 |
will read from standard input and mark the produced tags as belonging to |
763 |
the file FILE. |
764 |
|
765 |
+++ |
766 |
** The command line option --no-windows has been changed to |
767 |
--no-window-system. The old one still works, but is deprecated. |
768 |
|
769 |
+++ |
770 |
** The command `list-text-properties-at' has been deleted because |
771 |
C-u C-x = gives the same information and more. |
772 |
|
773 |
+++ |
774 |
** `buffer-menu' and `list-buffers' now list buffers whose names begin |
775 |
with a space, when those buffers are visiting files. Normally buffers |
776 |
whose names begin with space are omitted. |
777 |
|
778 |
+++ |
779 |
** You can now customize fill-nobreak-predicate to control where |
780 |
filling can break lines. We provide two sample predicates, |
781 |
fill-single-word-nobreak-p and fill-french-nobreak-p. |
782 |
|
783 |
+++ |
784 |
** New user option `add-log-always-start-new-record'. |
785 |
When this option is enabled, M-x add-change-log-entry will always |
786 |
start a new record regardless of when the last record is. |
787 |
|
788 |
+++ |
789 |
** SGML mode has indentation and supports XML syntax. |
790 |
The new variable `sgml-xml-mode' tells SGML mode to use XML syntax. |
791 |
When this option is enabled, SGML tags are inserted in XML style, |
792 |
i.e., there is always a closing tag. |
793 |
By default, its setting is inferred on a buffer-by-buffer basis |
794 |
from the file name or buffer contents. |
795 |
|
796 |
+++ |
797 |
** `xml-mode' is now an alias for `smgl-mode', which has XML support. |
798 |
|
799 |
+++ |
800 |
** New user option `isearch-resume-enabled'. |
801 |
This option can be disabled, to avoid the normal behavior of isearch |
802 |
which puts calls to `isearch-resume' in the command history. |
803 |
|
804 |
--- |
805 |
** When the *scratch* buffer is recreated, its mode is set from |
806 |
initial-major-mode, which normally is lisp-interaction-mode, |
807 |
instead of using default-major-mode. |
808 |
|
809 |
--- |
810 |
** Lisp mode now uses font-lock-doc-face for the docstrings. |
811 |
|
812 |
--- |
813 |
** Perl mode has a new variable `perl-indent-continued-arguments'. |
814 |
|
815 |
+++ |
816 |
** Fortran mode has a new variable `fortran-directive-re'. |
817 |
Adapt this to match the format of any compiler directives you use. |
818 |
Lines that match are never indented, and are given distinctive font-locking. |
819 |
|
820 |
--- |
821 |
** F90 mode has new navigation commands `f90-end-of-block', |
822 |
`f90-beginning-of-block', `f90-next-block', `f90-previous-block'. |
823 |
|
824 |
--- |
825 |
** Prolog mode has a new variable `prolog-font-lock-keywords' |
826 |
to support use of font-lock. |
827 |
|
828 |
+++ |
829 |
** `special-display-buffer-names' and `special-display-regexps' now |
830 |
understand two new boolean pseudo-frame-parameters `same-frame' and |
831 |
`same-window'. |
832 |
|
833 |
+++ |
834 |
** M-x setenv now expands environment variables of the form `$foo' and |
835 |
`${foo}' in the specified new value of the environment variable. To |
836 |
include a `$' in the value, use `$$'. |
837 |
|
838 |
+++ |
839 |
** File-name completion can now ignore directories. |
840 |
If an element of the list in `completion-ignored-extensions' ends in a |
841 |
slash `/', it indicates a subdirectory that should be ignored when |
842 |
completing file names. Elements of `completion-ignored-extensions' |
843 |
which do not end in a slash are never considered when a completion |
844 |
candidate is a directory. |
845 |
|
846 |
+++ |
847 |
** The completion commands TAB, SPC and ? in the minibuffer apply only |
848 |
to the text before point. If there is text in the buffer after point, |
849 |
it remains unchanged. |
850 |
|
851 |
+++ |
852 |
** New user option `inhibit-startup-buffer-menu'. |
853 |
When loading many files, for instance with `emacs *', Emacs normally |
854 |
displays a buffer menu. This option turns the buffer menu off. |
855 |
|
856 |
--- |
857 |
** Rmail now displays 5-digit message ids in its summary buffer. |
858 |
|
859 |
--- |
860 |
** On MS Windows, the "system caret" now follows the cursor. |
861 |
This enables Emacs to work better with programs that need to track |
862 |
the cursor, for example screen magnifiers and text to speech programs. |
863 |
|
864 |
--- |
865 |
** Tooltips now work on MS Windows. |
866 |
See the Emacs 21.1 NEWS entry for tooltips for details. |
867 |
|
868 |
--- |
869 |
** Some images are now supported on Windows. |
870 |
PBM and XBM images are supported, other formats which require external |
871 |
libraries may be supported in future. |
872 |
|
873 |
--- |
874 |
** Pointing devices with more than 3 buttons are now supported on MS Windows. |
875 |
The new variable `w32-pass-extra-mouse-buttons-to-system' controls |
876 |
whether Emacs should handle the extra buttons itself (the default), or |
877 |
pass them to Windows to be handled with system-wide functions. |
878 |
|
879 |
+++ |
880 |
** Under X11, it is possible to swap Alt and Meta (and Super and Hyper). |
881 |
The new variables `x-alt-keysym', `x-hyper-keysym', `x-meta-keysym', |
882 |
and `x-super-keysym' can be used to choose which keysyms Emacs should |
883 |
use for the modifiers. For example, the following two lines swap |
884 |
Meta and Alt: |
885 |
(setq x-alt-keysym 'meta) |
886 |
(setq x-meta-keysym 'alt) |
887 |
|
888 |
--- |
889 |
** A French translation of the `Emacs Survival Guide' is available. |
890 |
|
891 |
--- |
892 |
** A French translation of the Emacs Tutorial is available. |
893 |
|
894 |
** New modes and packages |
895 |
|
896 |
--- |
897 |
*** The new ido package is an extension of the iswitchb package |
898 |
to do interactive opening of files and directories in addition to |
899 |
interactive buffer switching. Ido is a superset of iswitchb (with a |
900 |
few exceptions), so don't enable both packages. |
901 |
|
902 |
--- |
903 |
*** The new cua package provides CUA-like keybindings using C-x for |
904 |
cut (kill), C-c for copy, C-v for paste (yank), and C-z for undo. |
905 |
With cua, the region can be set and extended using shifted movement |
906 |
keys (like pc-selection-mode) and typed text replaces the active |
907 |
region (like delete-selection-mode). Do not enable these modes with |
908 |
cua-mode. Customize the variable `cua-mode' to enable cua. |
909 |
|
910 |
In addition, cua provides unified rectangle support with visible |
911 |
rectangle highlighting: Use S-return to start a rectangle, extend it |
912 |
using the movement commands (or mouse-3), and cut or copy it using C-x |
913 |
or C-c (using C-w and M-w also works). |
914 |
|
915 |
Use M-o and M-c to `open' or `close' the rectangle, use M-b or M-f, to |
916 |
fill it with blanks or another character, use M-u or M-l to upcase or |
917 |
downcase the rectangle, use M-i to increment the numbers in the |
918 |
rectangle, use M-n to fill the rectangle with a numeric sequence (such |
919 |
as 10 20 30...), use M-r to replace a regexp in the rectangle, and use |
920 |
M-' or M-/ to restrict command on the rectangle to a subset of the |
921 |
rows. See the commentary in cua-base.el for more rectangle commands. |
922 |
|
923 |
Cua also provides unified support for registers: Use a numeric |
924 |
prefix argument between 0 and 9, i.e. M-0 .. M-9, for C-x, C-c, and |
925 |
C-v to cut or copy into register 0-9, or paste from register 0-9. |
926 |
|
927 |
The last text deleted (not killed) is automatically stored in |
928 |
register 0. This includes text deleted by typing text. |
929 |
|
930 |
Finally, cua provides a global mark which is set using S-C-space. |
931 |
When the global mark is active, any text which is cut or copied is |
932 |
automatically inserted at the global mark position. See the |
933 |
commentary in cua-base.el for more global mark related commands. |
934 |
|
935 |
The features of cua also works with the standard emacs bindings for |
936 |
kill, copy, yank, and undo. If you want to use cua mode, but don't |
937 |
want the C-x, C-c, C-v, and C-z bindings, you may customize the |
938 |
`cua-enable-cua-keys' variable. |
939 |
|
940 |
*** The new keypad setup package provides several common bindings for |
941 |
the numeric keypad which is available on most keyboards. The numeric |
942 |
keypad typically has the digits 0 to 9, a decimal point, keys marked |
943 |
+, -, /, and *, an Enter key, and a NumLock toggle key. The keypad |
944 |
package only controls the use of the digit and decimal keys. |
945 |
|
946 |
By customizing the variables `keypad-setup', `keypad-shifted-setup', |
947 |
`keypad-numlock-setup', and `keypad-numlock-shifted-setup', or by |
948 |
using the function `keypad-setup', you can rebind all digit keys and |
949 |
the decimal key of the keypad in one step for each of the four |
950 |
possible combinations of the Shift key state (not pressed/pressed) and |
951 |
the NumLock toggle state (off/on). |
952 |
|
953 |
The choices for the keypad keys in each of the above states are: |
954 |
`Plain numeric keypad' where the keys generates plain digits, |
955 |
`Numeric keypad with decimal key' where the character produced by the |
956 |
decimal key can be customized individually (for internationalization), |
957 |
`Numeric Prefix Arg' where the keypad keys produce numeric prefix args |
958 |
for emacs editing commands, `Cursor keys' and `Shifted Cursor keys' |
959 |
where the keys work like (shifted) arrow keys, home/end, etc., and |
960 |
`Unspecified/User-defined' where the keypad keys (kp-0, kp-1, etc.) |
961 |
are left unspecified and can be bound individually through the global |
962 |
or local keymaps. |
963 |
|
964 |
*** The new kmacro package provides a simpler user interface to |
965 |
emacs' keyboard macro facilities. |
966 |
|
967 |
Basically, it uses two function keys (default F3 and F4) like this: |
968 |
F3 starts a macro, F4 ends the macro, and pressing F4 again executes |
969 |
the last macro. While defining the macro, F3 inserts a counter value |
970 |
which automatically increments every time the macro is executed. |
971 |
|
972 |
There is now a keyboard macro ring which stores the most recently |
973 |
defined macros. |
974 |
|
975 |
The C-x C-k sequence is now a prefix for the kmacro keymap which |
976 |
defines bindings for moving through the keyboard macro ring, |
977 |
C-x C-k C-p and C-x C-k C-n, editing the last macro C-x C-k C-e, |
978 |
manipulating the macro counter and format via C-x C-k C-c, |
979 |
C-x C-k C-a, and C-x C-k C-f. See the commentary in kmacro.el |
980 |
for more commands. |
981 |
|
982 |
The normal macro bindings C-x (, C-x ), and C-x e now interfaces to |
983 |
the keyboard macro ring. |
984 |
|
985 |
The C-x e command now automatically terminates the current macro |
986 |
before calling it, if used while defining a macro. |
987 |
|
988 |
In addition, when ending or calling a macro with C-x e, the macro can |
989 |
be repeated immediately by typing just the `e'. You can customize |
990 |
this behaviour via the variable kmacro-call-repeat-key and |
991 |
kmacro-call-repeat-with-arg. |
992 |
|
993 |
Keyboard macros can now be debugged and edited interactively. |
994 |
C-x C-k SPC will step through the last keyboard macro one key sequence |
995 |
at a time, prompting for the actions to take. |
996 |
|
997 |
+++ |
998 |
*** Calc is now part of the Emacs distribution. |
999 |
|
1000 |
Calc is an advanced desk calculator and mathematical tool written in |
1001 |
Emacs Lisp. Its documentation is in a separate manual; within Emacs, |
1002 |
type "C-h i m calc RET" to read that manual. A reference card is |
1003 |
available in `etc/calccard.tex' and `etc/calccard.ps'. |
1004 |
|
1005 |
+++ |
1006 |
*** The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual is now part of the distribution. |
1007 |
|
1008 |
The ELisp reference manual in Info format is built as part of the |
1009 |
Emacs build procedure and installed together with the Emacs User |
1010 |
Manual. A menu item was added to the menu bar that makes it easy |
1011 |
accessible (Help->More Manuals->Emacs Lisp Reference). |
1012 |
|
1013 |
+++ |
1014 |
*** Tramp is now part of the distribution. |
1015 |
|
1016 |
This package is similar to Ange-FTP: it allows you to edit remote |
1017 |
files. But whereas Ange-FTP uses FTP to access the remote host, |
1018 |
Tramp uses a shell connection. The shell connection is always used |
1019 |
for filename completion and directory listings and suchlike, but for |
1020 |
the actual file transfer, you can choose between the so-called |
1021 |
`inline' methods (which transfer the files through the shell |
1022 |
connection using base64 or uu encoding) and the `out-of-band' methods |
1023 |
(which invoke an external copying program such as `rcp' or `scp' or |
1024 |
`rsync' to do the copying). |
1025 |
|
1026 |
Shell connections can be acquired via `rsh', `ssh', `telnet' and also |
1027 |
`su' and `sudo'. |
1028 |
|
1029 |
--- |
1030 |
*** The Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp manual is now part of |
1031 |
the distribution. |
1032 |
|
1033 |
This manual is now part of the standard distribution and is installed, |
1034 |
together with the Emacs User Manual, into the Info directory. A menu |
1035 |
item was added to the menu bar that makes it easy accessible |
1036 |
(Help->More Manuals->Introduction to Emacs Lisp). |
1037 |
|
1038 |
--- |
1039 |
*** The new global minor mode `file-name-shadow-mode' modifies the way |
1040 |
filenames being entered by the user in the minibuffer are displayed, so |
1041 |
that it's clear when part of the entered filename will be ignored due to |
1042 |
emacs' filename parsing rules. The ignored portion can be made dim, |
1043 |
invisible, or otherwise less visually noticable. The display method may |
1044 |
be displayed by customizing the variable `file-name-shadow-properties'. |
1045 |
|
1046 |
--- |
1047 |
*** The ruler-mode.el library provides a minor mode for displaying an |
1048 |
"active" ruler in the header line. You can use the mouse to visually |
1049 |
change the `fill-column', `window-margins' and `tab-stop-list' |
1050 |
settings. |
1051 |
|
1052 |
--- |
1053 |
*** The minor mode Reveal mode makes text visible on the fly as you |
1054 |
move your cursor into hidden region of the buffer. |
1055 |
It should work with any package that uses overlays to hide parts |
1056 |
of a buffer, such as outline-minor-mode, hs-minor-mode, hide-ifdef-mode, ... |
1057 |
|
1058 |
There is also Global Reveal mode which affects all buffers. |
1059 |
|
1060 |
--- |
1061 |
*** The new package ibuffer provides a powerful, completely |
1062 |
customizable replacement for buff-menu.el. |
1063 |
|
1064 |
*** The new package table.el implements editable, WYSIWYG, embedded |
1065 |
`text tables' in Emacs buffers. It simulates the effect of putting |
1066 |
these tables in a special major mode. The package emulates WYSIWYG |
1067 |
table editing available in modern word processors. The package also |
1068 |
can generate a table source in typesetting and markup languages such |
1069 |
as latex and html from the visually laid out text table. |
1070 |
|
1071 |
--- |
1072 |
** Support for `magic cookie' standout modes has been removed. |
1073 |
Emacs will still work on terminals that require magic cookies in order |
1074 |
to use standout mode, however they will not be able to display |
1075 |
mode-lines in inverse-video. |
1076 |
|
1077 |
** The obsolete C mode (c-mode.el) has been removed to avoid problems |
1078 |
with Custom. |
1079 |
|
1080 |
|
1081 |
* Lisp Changes in Emacs 21.4 |
1082 |
|
1083 |
** When you are printing using print-continuous-numbering, |
1084 |
if no objects have had to be recorded in print-number-table, |
1085 |
all elements of print-number-table are nil. |
1086 |
|
1087 |
** When using non-toolkit scroll bars with the default width, |
1088 |
the scroll-bar-width frame parameter value is nil. |
1089 |
|
1090 |
** The new function copy-abbrev-table returns a new abbrev table that |
1091 |
is a copy of a given abbrev table. |
1092 |
|
1093 |
+++ |
1094 |
** The option --script FILE runs Emacs in batch mode and loads FILE. |
1095 |
It is useful for writing Emacs Lisp shell script files, because they |
1096 |
can start with this line: |
1097 |
|
1098 |
#!/usr/bin/emacs --script |
1099 |
|
1100 |
** A function's docstring can now hold the function's usage info on |
1101 |
its last line. It should match the regexp "\n\n(fn.*)\\'". |
1102 |
|
1103 |
** New CCL functions `lookup-character' and `lookup-integer' access |
1104 |
hash tables defined by the Lisp function `define-translation-hash-table'. |
1105 |
|
1106 |
** The new function `minibufferp' returns non-nil if its optional buffer |
1107 |
argument is a minibuffer. If the argument is omitted it defaults to |
1108 |
the current buffer. |
1109 |
|
1110 |
** There is a new Warnings facility; see the functions `warn' |
1111 |
and `display-warning'. |
1112 |
|
1113 |
** The functions all-completions and try-completion now accept lists |
1114 |
of strings as well as hash-tables additionally to alists, obarrays |
1115 |
and functions. Furthermore, the function `test-completion' is now |
1116 |
exported to Lisp. |
1117 |
|
1118 |
** When pure storage overflows while dumping, Emacs now prints how |
1119 |
much pure storage it will approximately need. |
1120 |
|
1121 |
** The new variable `auto-coding-functions' lets you specify functions |
1122 |
to examine a file being visited and deduce the proper coding system |
1123 |
for it. (If the coding system is detected incorrectly for a specific |
1124 |
file, you can put a `coding:' tags to override it.) |
1125 |
|
1126 |
** The new function `merge-coding-systems' fills in unspecified aspects |
1127 |
of one coding system from another coding system. |
1128 |
|
1129 |
** The variable `safe-local-eval-forms' specifies a list of forms that |
1130 |
are ok to evaluate when they appear in an `eval' local variables |
1131 |
specification. Normally Emacs asks for confirmation before evaluating |
1132 |
such a form, but if the form appears in this list, no confirmation is |
1133 |
needed. |
1134 |
|
1135 |
** If a function has a non-nil `safe-local-eval-function' property, |
1136 |
that means it is ok to evaluate some calls to that function when it |
1137 |
appears in an `eval' local variables specification. If the property |
1138 |
is t, then any form calling that function with constant arguments is |
1139 |
ok. If the property is a function or list of functions, they are called |
1140 |
with the form as argument, and if any returns t, the form is ok to call. |
1141 |
|
1142 |
If the form is not "ok to call", that means Emacs asks for |
1143 |
confirmation as before. |
1144 |
|
1145 |
** Controlling the left and right fringe widths. |
1146 |
|
1147 |
The left and right fringe widths can now be controlled by setting the |
1148 |
`left-fringe' and `right-fringe' frame parameters to an integer value |
1149 |
specifying the width in pixels. Setting the width to 0 effectively |
1150 |
removes the corresponding fringe. |
1151 |
|
1152 |
The actual fringe widths may deviate from the specified widths, since |
1153 |
the combined fringe widths must match an integral number of columns. |
1154 |
The extra width is distributed evenly between the left and right fringe. |
1155 |
For force a specific fringe width, specify the width as a negative |
1156 |
integer (if both widths are negative, only the left fringe gets the |
1157 |
specified width). |
1158 |
|
1159 |
Setting the width to nil (the default), restores the default fringe |
1160 |
width which is the minimum number of pixels necessary to display any |
1161 |
of the currently defined fringe bitmaps. The width of the built-in |
1162 |
fringe bitmaps is 8 pixels. |
1163 |
|
1164 |
+++ |
1165 |
** Renamed file hooks to follow the convention: |
1166 |
find-file-hooks to find-file-hook, |
1167 |
find-file-not-found-hooks to find-file-not-found-functions, |
1168 |
write-file-hooks to write-file-functions, |
1169 |
write-contents-hooks to write-contents-functions. |
1170 |
Marked local-write-file-hooks as obsolete (use the LOCAL arg of `add-hook'). |
1171 |
|
1172 |
** The new variable `delete-frame-functions' replaces `delete-frame-hook'. |
1173 |
It was renamed to follow the naming conventions for abnormal hooks. The old |
1174 |
name remains available as an alias, but has been marked obsolete. |
1175 |
|
1176 |
** The `read-file-name' function now takes an additional argument which |
1177 |
specifies a predicate which the file name read must satify. The |
1178 |
new variable `read-file-name-predicate' contains the predicate argument |
1179 |
while reading the file name from the minibuffer; the predicate in this |
1180 |
variable is used by read-file-name-internal to filter the completion list. |
1181 |
|
1182 |
** The new variable `read-file-name-function' can be used by lisp code |
1183 |
to override the internal read-file-name function. |
1184 |
|
1185 |
** The new function `read-directory-name' can be used instead of |
1186 |
`read-file-name' to read a directory name; when used, completion |
1187 |
will only show directories. |
1188 |
|
1189 |
** The new function `file-remote-p' tests a file name and returns |
1190 |
non-nil if it specifies a remote file (one that Emacs accesses using |
1191 |
its own special methods and not directly through the file system). |
1192 |
|
1193 |
** When a Lisp file uses CL functions at run-time, compiling the file |
1194 |
now issues warnings about these calls, unless the file performs |
1195 |
(require 'cl) when loaded. |
1196 |
|
1197 |
** The new Lisp library fringe.el controls the apperance of fringes. |
1198 |
|
1199 |
** The `defmacro' form may contain declarations specifying how to |
1200 |
indent the macro in Lisp mode and how to debug it with Edebug. The |
1201 |
syntax of defmacro has been extended to |
1202 |
|
1203 |
(defmacro NAME LAMBDA-LIST [DOC-STRING] [DECLARATION ...] ...) |
1204 |
|
1205 |
DECLARATION is a list `(declare DECLARATION-SPECIFIER ...)'. The |
1206 |
declaration specifiers supported are: |
1207 |
|
1208 |
(indent INDENT) |
1209 |
Set NAME's `lisp-indent-function' property to INDENT. |
1210 |
|
1211 |
(edebug DEBUG) |
1212 |
Set NAME's `edebug-form-spec' property to DEBUG. (This is |
1213 |
equivalent to writing a `def-edebug-spec' for the macro. |
1214 |
|
1215 |
** Interactive commands can be remapped through keymaps. |
1216 |
|
1217 |
This is an alternative to using defadvice or substitute-key-definition |
1218 |
to modify the behavior of a key binding using the normal keymap |
1219 |
binding and lookup functionality. |
1220 |
|
1221 |
When a key sequence is bound to a command, and that command is |
1222 |
remapped to another command, that command is run instead of the |
1223 |
original command. |
1224 |
|
1225 |
Example: |
1226 |
Suppose that minor mode my-mode has defined the commands |
1227 |
my-kill-line and my-kill-word, and it wants C-k (and any other key |
1228 |
bound to kill-line) to run the command my-kill-line instead of |
1229 |
kill-line, and likewise it wants to run my-kill-word instead of |
1230 |
kill-word. |
1231 |
|
1232 |
Instead of rebinding C-k and the other keys in the minor mode map, |
1233 |
command remapping allows you to directly map kill-line into |
1234 |
my-kill-line and kill-word into my-kill-word through the minor mode |
1235 |
map using define-key: |
1236 |
|
1237 |
(define-key my-mode-map [remap kill-line] 'my-kill-line) |
1238 |
(define-key my-mode-map [remap kill-word] 'my-kill-word) |
1239 |
|
1240 |
Now, when my-mode is enabled, and the user enters C-k or M-d, |
1241 |
the commands my-kill-line and my-kill-word are run. |
1242 |
|
1243 |
Notice that only one level of remapping is supported. In the above |
1244 |
example, this means that if my-kill-line is remapped to other-kill, |
1245 |
then C-k still runs my-kill-line. |
1246 |
|
1247 |
The following changes have been made to provide command remapping: |
1248 |
|
1249 |
- Command remappings are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key |
1250 |
`remap', i.e. `(define-key MAP [remap CMD] DEF)' remaps command CMD |
1251 |
to definition DEF in keymap MAP. The definition is not limited to |
1252 |
another command; it can be anything accepted for a normal binding. |
1253 |
|
1254 |
- The new function `remap-command' returns the binding for a remapped |
1255 |
command in the current keymaps, or nil if it isn't remapped. |
1256 |
|
1257 |
- key-binding now remaps interactive commands unless the optional |
1258 |
third argument NO-REMAP is non-nil. |
1259 |
|
1260 |
- where-is-internal now returns nil for a remapped command (e.g. |
1261 |
kill-line if my-mode is enabled), and the actual key binding for |
1262 |
the command it is remapped to (e.g. C-k for my-kill-line). |
1263 |
It also has a new optional fifth argument, NO-REMAP, which inhibits |
1264 |
remapping if non-nil (e.g. it returns C-k for kill-line and |
1265 |
<kill-line> for my-kill-line). |
1266 |
|
1267 |
- The new variable `this-original-command' contains the original |
1268 |
command before remapping. It is equal to `this-command' when the |
1269 |
command was not remapped. |
1270 |
|
1271 |
** New variable emulation-mode-map-alists. |
1272 |
|
1273 |
Lisp packages using many minor mode keymaps can now maintain their own |
1274 |
keymap alist separate from minor-mode-map-alist by adding their keymap |
1275 |
alist to this list. |
1276 |
|
1277 |
** Atomic change groups. |
1278 |
|
1279 |
To perform some changes in the current buffer "atomically" so that |
1280 |
they either all succeed or are all undone, use `atomic-change-group' |
1281 |
around the code that makes changes. For instance: |
1282 |
|
1283 |
(atomic-change-group |
1284 |
(insert foo) |
1285 |
(delete-region x y)) |
1286 |
|
1287 |
If an error (or other nonlocal exit) occurs inside the body of |
1288 |
`atomic-change-group', it unmakes all the changes in that buffer that |
1289 |
were during the execution of the body. The change group has no effect |
1290 |
on any other buffers--any such changes remain. |
1291 |
|
1292 |
If you need something more sophisticated, you can directly call the |
1293 |
lower-level functions that `atomic-change-group' uses. Here is how. |
1294 |
|
1295 |
To set up a change group for one buffer, call `prepare-change-group'. |
1296 |
Specify the buffer as argument; it defaults to the current buffer. |
1297 |
This function returns a "handle" for the change group. You must save |
1298 |
the handle to activate the change group and then finish it. |
1299 |
|
1300 |
Before you change the buffer again, you must activate the change |
1301 |
group. Pass the handle to `activate-change-group' afterward to |
1302 |
do this. |
1303 |
|
1304 |
After you make the changes, you must finish the change group. You can |
1305 |
either accept the changes or cancel them all. Call |
1306 |
`accept-change-group' to accept the changes in the group as final; |
1307 |
call `cancel-change-group' to undo them all. |
1308 |
|
1309 |
You should use `unwind-protect' to make sure the group is always |
1310 |
finished. The call to `activate-change-group' should be inside the |
1311 |
`unwind-protect', in case the user types C-g just after it runs. |
1312 |
(This is one reason why `prepare-change-group' and |
1313 |
`activate-change-group' are separate functions.) Once you finish the |
1314 |
group, don't use the handle again--don't try to finish the same group |
1315 |
twice. |
1316 |
|
1317 |
To make a multibuffer change group, call `prepare-change-group' once |
1318 |
for each buffer you want to cover, then use `nconc' to combine the |
1319 |
returned values, like this: |
1320 |
|
1321 |
(nconc (prepare-change-group buffer-1) |
1322 |
(prepare-change-group buffer-2)) |
1323 |
|
1324 |
You can then activate the multibuffer change group with a single call |
1325 |
to `activate-change-group', and finish it with a single call to |
1326 |
`accept-change-group' or `cancel-change-group'. |
1327 |
|
1328 |
Nested use of several change groups for the same buffer works as you |
1329 |
would expect. Non-nested use of change groups for the same buffer |
1330 |
will lead to undesirable results, so don't let it happen; the first |
1331 |
change group you start for any given buffer should be the last one |
1332 |
finished. |
1333 |
|
1334 |
+++ |
1335 |
** New variable char-property-alias-alist. |
1336 |
|
1337 |
This variable allows you to create alternative names for text |
1338 |
properties. It works at the same level as `default-text-properties', |
1339 |
although it applies to overlays as well. This variable was introduced |
1340 |
to implement the `font-lock-face' property. |
1341 |
|
1342 |
** New special text property `font-lock-face'. |
1343 |
|
1344 |
This property acts like the `face' property, but it is controlled by |
1345 |
M-x font-lock-mode. It is not, strictly speaking, a builtin text |
1346 |
property. Instead, it is implemented inside font-core.el, using the |
1347 |
new variable `char-property-alias-alist'. |
1348 |
|
1349 |
** New function remove-list-of-text-properties. |
1350 |
|
1351 |
The new function `remove-list-of-text-properties' is almost the same |
1352 |
as `remove-text-properties'. The only difference is that it takes |
1353 |
a list of property names as argument rather than a property list. |
1354 |
|
1355 |
** New functions insert-for-yank and insert-buffer-substring-as-yank. |
1356 |
|
1357 |
These functions work like `insert' and `insert-buffer-substring', but |
1358 |
removes the text properties in the `yank-excluded-properties' list. |
1359 |
|
1360 |
** New function insert-buffer-substring-no-properties. |
1361 |
|
1362 |
** New function display-supports-face-attributes-p may be used to test |
1363 |
whether a given set of face attributes is actually displayable. |
1364 |
|
1365 |
A new predicate `supports' has also been added to the `defface' face |
1366 |
specification language, which can be used to do this test for faces |
1367 |
defined with defface. |
1368 |
|
1369 |
** face-attribute, face-foreground, face-background, and face-stipple now |
1370 |
accept a new optional argument, INHERIT, which controls how face |
1371 |
inheritance is used when determining the value of a face attribute. |
1372 |
|
1373 |
** New functions face-attribute-relative-p and merge-face-attribute |
1374 |
help with handling relative face attributes. |
1375 |
|
1376 |
** Enhanced networking support. |
1377 |
|
1378 |
*** There is a new `make-network-process' function which supports |
1379 |
opening of stream and datagram connections to a server, as well as |
1380 |
create a stream or datagram server inside emacs. |
1381 |
|
1382 |
- A server is started using :server t arg. |
1383 |
- Datagram connection is selected using :type 'datagram arg. |
1384 |
- A server can open on a random port using :service t arg. |
1385 |
- Local sockets are supported using :family 'local arg. |
1386 |
- Non-blocking connect is supported using :nowait t arg. |
1387 |
|
1388 |
To test for the availability of a given feature, use featurep like this: |
1389 |
(featurep 'make-network-process '(:type datagram)) |
1390 |
|
1391 |
*** Original open-network-stream is now emulated using make-network-process. |
1392 |
|
1393 |
*** New function open-network-stream-nowait. |
1394 |
|
1395 |
This function initiates a non-blocking connect and returns immediately |
1396 |
before the connection is established. The filter and sentinel |
1397 |
functions can be specified as arguments to open-network-stream-nowait. |
1398 |
When the non-blocking connect completes, the sentinel is called with |
1399 |
the status matching "open" or "failed". |
1400 |
|
1401 |
*** New function open-network-stream-server. |
1402 |
MORE INFO NEEDED HERE. |
1403 |
|
1404 |
*** New functions process-datagram-address and set-process-datagram-address. |
1405 |
MORE INFO NEEDED HERE. |
1406 |
|
1407 |
*** By default, the function process-contact still returns (HOST SERVICE) |
1408 |
for a network process. Using the new optional KEY arg, the complete list |
1409 |
of network process properties or a specific property can be selected. |
1410 |
|
1411 |
Using :local and :remote as the KEY, the address of the local or |
1412 |
remote end-point is returned. An Inet address is represented as a 5 |
1413 |
element vector, where the first 4 elements contain the IP address and |
1414 |
the fifth is the port number. |
1415 |
|
1416 |
*** Network processes can now be stopped and restarted with |
1417 |
`stop-process' and `continue-process'. For a server process, no |
1418 |
connections are accepted in the stopped state. For a client process, |
1419 |
no input is received in the stopped state. |
1420 |
|
1421 |
*** Function list-processes now has an optional argument; if non-nil, |
1422 |
only the processes whose query-on-exit flag is set are listed. |
1423 |
|
1424 |
*** New set-process-query-on-exit-flag and process-query-on-exit-flag |
1425 |
functions. The existing process-kill-without-query function is still |
1426 |
supported, but new code should use the new functions. |
1427 |
|
1428 |
** New function copy-tree. |
1429 |
|
1430 |
** New function substring-no-properties. |
1431 |
|
1432 |
** New function minibuffer-selected-window. |
1433 |
|
1434 |
** New function `call-process-shell-command'. |
1435 |
|
1436 |
** The dummy function keys made by easymenu |
1437 |
are now always lower case. If you specify the |
1438 |
menu item name "Ada", for instance, it uses `ada' |
1439 |
as the "key" bound by that key binding. |
1440 |
|
1441 |
This is relevant only if Lisp code looks for |
1442 |
the bindings that were made with easymenu. |
1443 |
|
1444 |
** The function `commandp' takes an additional optional |
1445 |
argument. If it is non-nil, then `commandp' checks |
1446 |
for a function that could be called with `call-interactively', |
1447 |
and does not return t for keyboard macros. |
1448 |
|
1449 |
** master-mode.el implements a minor mode for scrolling a slave |
1450 |
buffer without leaving your current buffer, the master buffer. |
1451 |
|
1452 |
It can be used by sql.el, for example: the SQL buffer is the master |
1453 |
and its SQLi buffer is the slave. This allows you to scroll the SQLi |
1454 |
buffer containing the output from the SQL buffer containing the |
1455 |
commands. |
1456 |
|
1457 |
This is how to use sql.el and master.el together: the variable |
1458 |
sql-buffer contains the slave buffer. It is a local variable in the |
1459 |
SQL buffer. |
1460 |
|
1461 |
(add-hook 'sql-mode-hook |
1462 |
(function (lambda () |
1463 |
(master-mode t) |
1464 |
(master-set-slave sql-buffer)))) |
1465 |
(add-hook 'sql-set-sqli-hook |
1466 |
(function (lambda () |
1467 |
(master-set-slave sql-buffer)))) |
1468 |
|
1469 |
** File local variables. |
1470 |
|
1471 |
A file local variables list cannot specify a string with text |
1472 |
properties--any specified text properties are discarded. |
1473 |
|
1474 |
+++ |
1475 |
*** The meanings of scroll-up-aggressively and scroll-down-aggressively |
1476 |
have been interchanged, so that the former now controls scrolling up, |
1477 |
and the latter now controls scrolling down. |
1478 |
|
1479 |
+++ |
1480 |
** New function window-body-height. |
1481 |
|
1482 |
This is like window-height but does not count the mode line |
1483 |
or the header line. |
1484 |
|
1485 |
** New function format-mode-line. |
1486 |
|
1487 |
This returns the mode-line or header-line of the selected (or a |
1488 |
specified) window as a string with or without text properties. |
1489 |
|
1490 |
** New functions `lax-plist-get' and `lax-plist-put'. |
1491 |
|
1492 |
These functions are like `plist-get' and `plist-put' except that they |
1493 |
compare the property name using `equal' rather than `eq'. |
1494 |
|
1495 |
** New function `tool-bar-local-item-from-menu' |
1496 |
|
1497 |
The `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' most not be used (as previously |
1498 |
recommended) for making entries in the tool bar for local keymaps. |
1499 |
Instead, use the function `tool-bar-local-item-from-menu', which lets |
1500 |
you specify the map to use as an argument. |
1501 |
|
1502 |
+++ |
1503 |
** The function `atan' now accepts an optional second argument. |
1504 |
|
1505 |
When called with 2 arguments, as in `(atan Y X)', `atan' returns the |
1506 |
angle in radians between the vector [X, Y] and the X axis. (This is |
1507 |
equivalent to the standard C library function `atan2'.) |
1508 |
|
1509 |
+++ |
1510 |
** You can now make a window as short as one line. |
1511 |
|
1512 |
A window that is just one line tall does not display either a mode |
1513 |
line or a header line, even if the variables `mode-line-format' and |
1514 |
`header-line-format' call for them. A window that is two lines tall |
1515 |
cannot display both a mode line and a header line at once; if the |
1516 |
variables call for both, only the mode line actually appears. |
1517 |
|
1518 |
+++ |
1519 |
** The new frame parameter `tty-color-mode' specifies the mode to use |
1520 |
for color support on character terminal frames. Its value can be a |
1521 |
number of colors to support, or a symbol. See the Emacs Lisp |
1522 |
Reference manual for more detailed documentation. |
1523 |
|
1524 |
** Mode line display ignores text properties in the value |
1525 |
of a variable whose `risky-local-variables' property is nil. |
1526 |
|
1527 |
--- |
1528 |
** Indentation of simple and extended loop forms has been added to the |
1529 |
cl-indent package. The new user options |
1530 |
`lisp-loop-keyword-indentation', `lisp-loop-forms-indentation', and |
1531 |
`lisp-simple-loop-indentation' can be used to customize the |
1532 |
indentation of keywords and forms in loop forms. |
1533 |
|
1534 |
--- |
1535 |
** Indentation of backquoted forms has been made customizable in the |
1536 |
cl-indent package. See the new user option `lisp-backquote-indentation'. |
1537 |
|
1538 |
** Already true in Emacs 21.1, but not emphasized clearly enough: |
1539 |
|
1540 |
Multibyte buffers can now faithfully record all 256 character codes |
1541 |
from 0 to 255. As a result, most of the past reasons to use unibyte |
1542 |
buffers no longer exist. We only know of three reasons to use them |
1543 |
now: |
1544 |
|
1545 |
1. If you prefer to use unibyte text all of the time. |
1546 |
|
1547 |
2. For reading files into temporary buffers, when you want to avoid |
1548 |
the time it takes to convert the format. |
1549 |
|
1550 |
3. For binary files where format conversion would be pointless and |
1551 |
wasteful. |
1552 |
|
1553 |
** If text has a `keymap' property, that keymap takes precedence |
1554 |
over minor mode keymaps. |
1555 |
|
1556 |
** A hex escape in a string forces the string to be multibyte. |
1557 |
An octal escape makes it unibyte. |
1558 |
|
1559 |
** Only one of the beginning or end of an invisible, intangible region is |
1560 |
considered an acceptable value for point; which one is determined by |
1561 |
examining how the invisible/intangible properties are inherited when new |
1562 |
text is inserted adjacent to them. If text inserted at the beginning would |
1563 |
inherit the invisible/intangible properties, then that position is |
1564 |
considered unacceptable, and point is forced to the position following the |
1565 |
invisible/intangible text. If text inserted at the end would inherit the |
1566 |
properties, then the opposite happens. |
1567 |
|
1568 |
Thus, point can only go to one end of an invisible, intangible region, but |
1569 |
not the other one. This prevents C-f and C-b from appearing to stand still |
1570 |
on the screen. |
1571 |
|
1572 |
** field-beginning and field-end now accept an additional optional |
1573 |
argument, LIMIT. |
1574 |
|
1575 |
+++ |
1576 |
** define-abbrev now accepts an optional argument SYSTEM-FLAG. If |
1577 |
non-nil, this marks the abbrev as a "system" abbrev, which means that |
1578 |
it won't be stored in the user's abbrevs file if he saves the abbrevs. |
1579 |
Major modes that predefine some abbrevs should always specify this |
1580 |
flag. |
1581 |
|
1582 |
** Support for Mocklisp has been removed. |
1583 |
|
1584 |
** The function insert-string is now obsolete. |
1585 |
|
1586 |
** The precedence of file-name-handlers has been changed. |
1587 |
Instead of blindly choosing the first handler that matches, |
1588 |
find-file-name-handler now gives precedence to a file-name handler |
1589 |
that matches near the end of the file name. More specifically, the |
1590 |
handler whose (match-beginning 0) is the largest is chosen. |
1591 |
In case of ties, the old "first matched" rule applies. |
1592 |
|
1593 |
** Dense keymaps now handle inheritance correctly. |
1594 |
Previously a dense keymap would hide all of the simple-char key |
1595 |
bindings of the parent keymap. |
1596 |
|
1597 |
** jit-lock obeys a new text-property `jit-lock-defer-multiline'. |
1598 |
If a piece of text with that property gets contextually refontified |
1599 |
(see jit-lock-defer-contextually), then all of that text will |
1600 |
be refontified. This is useful when the syntax of a textual element |
1601 |
depends on text several lines further down (and when font-lock-multiline |
1602 |
is not appropriate to solve that problem). For example in Perl: |
1603 |
|
1604 |
s{ |
1605 |
foo |
1606 |
}{ |
1607 |
bar |
1608 |
}e |
1609 |
|
1610 |
Adding/removing the last `e' changes the `bar' from being a piece of |
1611 |
text to being a piece of code, so you'd put a jit-lock-defer-multiline |
1612 |
property over the second half of the command to force (deferred) |
1613 |
refontification of `bar' whenever the `e' is added/removed. |
1614 |
|
1615 |
** describe-vector now takes a second argument `describer' which is |
1616 |
called to print the entries' values. It defaults to `princ'. |
1617 |
|
1618 |
** defcustom and other custom declarations now use a default group |
1619 |
(the last group defined in the same file) when no :group was given. |
1620 |
|
1621 |
** emacsserver now runs pre-command-hook and post-command-hook when |
1622 |
it receives a request from emacsclient. |
1623 |
|
1624 |
** The variable `recursive-load-depth-limit' has been deleted. |
1625 |
Emacs now signals an error if the same file is loaded with more |
1626 |
than 3 levels of nesting. |
1627 |
|
1628 |
** The default values of paragraph-start and indent-line-function have |
1629 |
been changed to reflect those used in Text mode rather than those used |
1630 |
in Indented-Text mode. |
1631 |
|
1632 |
** If a major mode function has a non-nil `no-clone-indirect' |
1633 |
property, `clone-indirect-buffer' signals an error if you use |
1634 |
it in that buffer. |
1635 |
|
1636 |
** If you set `query-replace-skip-read-only' non-nil, |
1637 |
`query-replace' and related functions simply ignore |
1638 |
a match if part of it has a read-only property. |
1639 |
|
1640 |
** In `replace-match', the replacement text no longer inherits |
1641 |
properties from surrounding text. |
1642 |
|
1643 |
** New function `buffer-local-value'. |
1644 |
|
1645 |
- Function: buffer-local-value variable buffer |
1646 |
|
1647 |
This function returns the buffer-local binding of VARIABLE (a symbol) |
1648 |
in buffer BUFFER. If VARIABLE does not have a buffer-local binding in |
1649 |
buffer BUFFER, it returns the default value of VARIABLE instead. |
1650 |
|
1651 |
** New function `text-clone-create'. Text clones are chunks of text |
1652 |
that are kept identical by transparently propagating changes from one |
1653 |
clone to the other. |
1654 |
|
1655 |
** font-lock can manage arbitrary text-properties beside `face'. |
1656 |
*** the FACENAME returned in font-lock-keywords can be a list |
1657 |
of the form (face FACE PROP1 VAL1 PROP2 VAL2 ...) so you can set |
1658 |
other properties than `face'. |
1659 |
*** font-lock-extra-managed-props can be set to make sure those extra |
1660 |
properties are automatically cleaned up by font-lock. |
1661 |
|
1662 |
** The special treatment of faces whose names are of the form `fg:COLOR' |
1663 |
or `bg:COLOR' has been removed. Lisp programs should use the |
1664 |
`defface' facility for defining faces with specific colors. |
1665 |
|
1666 |
** The new function `run-mode-hooks' and the new macro `delay-mode-hooks' |
1667 |
are used by define-derived-mode to make sure the mode hook for the |
1668 |
parent mode is run at the end of the child mode. |
1669 |
|
1670 |
** define-derived-mode by default creates a new empty abbrev table. |
1671 |
It does not copy abbrevs from the parent mode's abbrev table. |
1672 |
|
1673 |
+++ |
1674 |
** `provide' and `featurep' now accept an optional second argument |
1675 |
to test/provide subfeatures. Also `provide' now checks `after-load-alist' |
1676 |
and run any code associated with the provided feature. |
1677 |
|
1678 |
** The variable `compilation-parse-errors-filename-function' can |
1679 |
be used to transform filenames found in compilation output. |
1680 |
|
1681 |
+++ |
1682 |
** Functions `file-name-sans-extension' and `file-name-extension' now |
1683 |
ignore the leading dots in file names, so that file names such as |
1684 |
`.emacs' are treated as extensionless. |
1685 |
|
1686 |
** Functions `user-uid' and `user-real-uid' now return floats if the |
1687 |
user UID doesn't fit in a Lisp integer. Function `user-full-name' |
1688 |
accepts a float as UID parameter. |
1689 |
|
1690 |
** `define-key-after' now accepts keys longer than 1. |
1691 |
|
1692 |
** The local variable `no-byte-compile' in elisp files is now obeyed. |
1693 |
|
1694 |
** The Emacs Lisp byte-compiler now displays the actual line and |
1695 |
character position of errors, where possible. Additionally, the form |
1696 |
of its warning and error messages have been brought more in line with |
1697 |
the output of other GNU tools. |
1698 |
|
1699 |
** New functions `keymap-prompt' and `current-active-maps'. |
1700 |
|
1701 |
** New function `describe-buffer-bindings'. |
1702 |
|
1703 |
** New vars `exec-suffixes' and `load-suffixes' used when |
1704 |
searching for an executable resp. an elisp file. |
1705 |
|
1706 |
** Variable aliases have been implemented: |
1707 |
|
1708 |
- Function: defvaralias ALIAS-VAR BASE-VAR [DOCSTRING] |
1709 |
|
1710 |
This function defines the symbol ALIAS-VAR as a variable alias for |
1711 |
symbol BASE-VAR. This means that retrieving the value of ALIAS-VAR |
1712 |
returns the value of BASE-VAR, and changing the value of ALIAS-VAR |
1713 |
changes the value of BASE-VAR. |
1714 |
|
1715 |
DOCSTRING, if present, is the documentation for ALIAS-VAR; else it has |
1716 |
the same documentation as BASE-VAR. |
1717 |
|
1718 |
- Function: indirect-variable VARIABLE |
1719 |
|
1720 |
This function returns the variable at the end of the chain of aliases |
1721 |
of VARIABLE. If VARIABLE is not a symbol, or if VARIABLE is not |
1722 |
defined as an alias, the function returns VARIABLE. |
1723 |
|
1724 |
It might be noteworthy that variables aliases work for all kinds of |
1725 |
variables, including buffer-local and frame-local variables. |
1726 |
|
1727 |
** Functions from `post-gc-hook' are run at the end of garbage |
1728 |
collection. The hook is run with GC inhibited, so use it with care. |
1729 |
|
1730 |
** If the second argument to `copy-file' is the name of a directory, |
1731 |
the file is copied to that directory instead of signaling an error. |
1732 |
|
1733 |
** The variables most-positive-fixnum and most-negative-fixnum |
1734 |
have been moved from the CL package to the core. |
1735 |
|
1736 |
** On MS Windows, locale-coding-system is used to interact with the OS. |
1737 |
The Windows specific variable w32-system-coding-system, which was |
1738 |
formerly used for that purpose is now an alias for locale-coding-system. |
1739 |
|
1740 |
** Functions y-or-n-p, read-char, read-keysequence and alike that |
1741 |
display a prompt but don't use the minibuffer now display the prompt |
1742 |
using the text properties (esp. the face) of the prompt string. |
1743 |
|
1744 |
** New packages: |
1745 |
|
1746 |
*** The new package syntax.el provides an efficient way to find the |
1747 |
current syntactic context (as returned by parse-partial-sexp). |
1748 |
|
1749 |
*** The new package bindat.el provides functions to unpack and pack |
1750 |
binary data structures, such as network packets, to and from Lisp |
1751 |
data structures. |
1752 |
|
1753 |
*** The TCL package tcl-mode.el was replaced by tcl.el. |
1754 |
This was actually done in Emacs-21.1, and was not documented. |
1755 |
|
1756 |
*** The new package button.el implements simple and fast `clickable buttons' |
1757 |
in emacs buffers. `buttons' are much lighter-weight than the `widgets' |
1758 |
implemented by widget.el, and can be used by lisp code that doesn't |
1759 |
require the full power of widgets. Emacs uses buttons for such things |
1760 |
as help and apropos buffers. |
1761 |
|
1762 |
|
1763 |
* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1 |
1764 |
|
1765 |
See the INSTALL file for information on installing extra libraries and |
1766 |
fonts to take advantage of the new graphical features and extra |
1767 |
charsets in this release. |
1768 |
|
1769 |
** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added. |
1770 |
|
1771 |
** Support for LynxOS has been added. |
1772 |
|
1773 |
** There are new configure options associated with the support for |
1774 |
images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure' |
1775 |
to list them. |
1776 |
|
1777 |
** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which |
1778 |
support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the |
1779 |
maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to |
1780 |
build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any |
1781 |
necessary changes to unexec. |
1782 |
|
1783 |
** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit |
1784 |
Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available. |
1785 |
|
1786 |
** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs |
1787 |
Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available. |
1788 |
|
1789 |
** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using |
1790 |
the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary. |
1791 |
|
1792 |
** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement |
1793 |
all of the new display features described below. The port currently |
1794 |
lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support. See the |
1795 |
"Emacs and the Mac OS" appendix in the Emacs manual, for the |
1796 |
description of aspects specific to the Mac. |
1797 |
|
1798 |
** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the |
1799 |
new display features described below. |
1800 |
|
1801 |
|
1802 |
* Changes in Emacs 21.1 |
1803 |
|
1804 |
** Emacs has a new redisplay engine. |
1805 |
|
1806 |
The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height. |
1807 |
Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing |
1808 |
oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height |
1809 |
of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in |
1810 |
the text. |
1811 |
|
1812 |
** Emacs has a new face implementation. |
1813 |
|
1814 |
The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the |
1815 |
font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family, |
1816 |
height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify. |
1817 |
These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together |
1818 |
specify a font. |
1819 |
|
1820 |
Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts. |
1821 |
These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found |
1822 |
under Lisp changes, below. |
1823 |
|
1824 |
** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames. |
1825 |
|
1826 |
Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors. |
1827 |
Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if |
1828 |
the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and |
1829 |
italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it. |
1830 |
Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face |
1831 |
attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored |
1832 |
on terminals. |
1833 |
|
1834 |
The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now |
1835 |
supported on character terminals. |
1836 |
|
1837 |
Emacs automatically remaps all X-style color specifications to one of |
1838 |
the colors supported by the terminal. This means you could have the |
1839 |
same color customizations that work both on a windowed display and on |
1840 |
a TTY or when Emacs is invoked with the -nw option. |
1841 |
|
1842 |
** New default font is Courier 12pt under X. |
1843 |
|
1844 |
** Sound support |
1845 |
|
1846 |
Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware |
1847 |
driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently |
1848 |
supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au). |
1849 |
You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' to enable |
1850 |
sound support. |
1851 |
|
1852 |
** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate. |
1853 |
|
1854 |
If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are |
1855 |
longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it |
1856 |
is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum |
1857 |
minibuffer window size by setting the following variables: |
1858 |
|
1859 |
- User option: max-mini-window-height |
1860 |
|
1861 |
Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a |
1862 |
fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it |
1863 |
specifies a number of lines. |
1864 |
|
1865 |
Default is 0.25. |
1866 |
|
1867 |
- User option: resize-mini-windows |
1868 |
|
1869 |
How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always |
1870 |
resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows |
1871 |
grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk |
1872 |
again. |
1873 |
|
1874 |
Default is `grow-only'. |
1875 |
|
1876 |
** LessTif support. |
1877 |
|
1878 |
Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see |
1879 |
<http://www.lesstif.org>). You will need version 0.92.26, or later. |
1880 |
|
1881 |
** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog. |
1882 |
|
1883 |
When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name |
1884 |
from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is |
1885 |
non-nil. |
1886 |
|
1887 |
** File selection dialog on MS-Windows is supported. |
1888 |
|
1889 |
When a file is visited by clicking File->Open, the MS-Windows version |
1890 |
now pops up a standard file selection dialog where you can select a |
1891 |
file to visit. File->Save As also pops up that dialog. |
1892 |
|
1893 |
** Toolkit scroll bars. |
1894 |
|
1895 |
Emacs now uses toolkit scroll bars if available. When configured for |
1896 |
LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scroll bar. Otherwise, when |
1897 |
configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll |
1898 |
bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll |
1899 |
bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring |
1900 |
Emacs. |
1901 |
|
1902 |
When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how |
1903 |
Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from |
1904 |
Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your |
1905 |
Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a |
1906 |
define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take |
1907 |
`s/freebsd.h' as an example. |
1908 |
|
1909 |
Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take |
1910 |
a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the |
1911 |
directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on |
1912 |
different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your |
1913 |
system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO', |
1914 |
add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file. |
1915 |
|
1916 |
The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or |
1917 |
`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO. |
1918 |
This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's |
1919 |
imake configuration file contains the necessary information. Since |
1920 |
Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually. |
1921 |
|
1922 |
** Tool bar support. |
1923 |
|
1924 |
Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details |
1925 |
of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level |
1926 |
changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is |
1927 |
displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved |
1928 |
if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome |
1929 |
icons will be used. |
1930 |
|
1931 |
To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons |
1932 |
for specific modes (with copyright assignments). |
1933 |
|
1934 |
** Tooltips. |
1935 |
|
1936 |
Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current |
1937 |
mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can |
1938 |
turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'. |
1939 |
|
1940 |
Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated, |
1941 |
variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with |
1942 |
the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the |
1943 |
tooltip display in the group `tooltip'. |
1944 |
|
1945 |
** Automatic Hscrolling |
1946 |
|
1947 |
Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if |
1948 |
`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be |
1949 |
customized. |
1950 |
|
1951 |
If a window is scrolled horizontally with set-window-hscroll, or |
1952 |
scroll-left/scroll-right (C-x <, C-x >), this serves as a lower bound |
1953 |
for automatic horizontal scrolling. Automatic scrolling will scroll |
1954 |
the text more to the left if necessary, but won't scroll the text more |
1955 |
to the right than the column set with set-window-hscroll etc. |
1956 |
|
1957 |
** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor |
1958 |
of its own. By default, when a window is selected, the cursor is |
1959 |
solid; otherwise, it is hollow. The user-option |
1960 |
`cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to display the |
1961 |
cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is shown, if |
1962 |
non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. |
1963 |
|
1964 |
** Fringes to the left and right of windows are used to display |
1965 |
truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The |
1966 |
foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by |
1967 |
customizing face `fringe'. |
1968 |
|
1969 |
** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. |
1970 |
You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'. |
1971 |
In particular, setting the `:box' attribute to nil turns off the 3D |
1972 |
appearance of the mode line. (The 3D appearance makes the mode line |
1973 |
occupy more space, and thus might cause the first or the last line of |
1974 |
the window to be partially obscured.) |
1975 |
|
1976 |
The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older |
1977 |
versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, is now deprecated. |
1978 |
However, setting it to nil will cause the `mode-line' face to be |
1979 |
ignored, and mode-lines to be drawn using the default text face. |
1980 |
|
1981 |
** Mouse-sensitive mode line. |
1982 |
|
1983 |
Different parts of the mode line have been made mouse-sensitive on all |
1984 |
systems which support the mouse. Moving the mouse to a |
1985 |
mouse-sensitive part in the mode line changes the appearance of the |
1986 |
mouse pointer to an arrow, and help about available mouse actions is |
1987 |
displayed either in the echo area, or in the tooltip window if you |
1988 |
have enabled one. |
1989 |
|
1990 |
Currently, the following actions have been defined: |
1991 |
|
1992 |
- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line goes to the next buffer. |
1993 |
|
1994 |
- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name goes to the previous buffer. |
1995 |
|
1996 |
- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or |
1997 |
`*') toggles the status. |
1998 |
|
1999 |
- Mouse-3 on the mode name displays a minor-mode menu. |
2000 |
|
2001 |
** Hourglass pointer |
2002 |
|
2003 |
Emacs can optionally display an hourglass pointer under X. You can |
2004 |
turn the display on or off by customizing group `cursor'. |
2005 |
|
2006 |
** Blinking cursor |
2007 |
|
2008 |
M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on |
2009 |
terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking |
2010 |
and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in |
2011 |
the group `cursor'. |
2012 |
|
2013 |
** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'. |
2014 |
|
2015 |
This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is |
2016 |
generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification. |
2017 |
See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more |
2018 |
details. |
2019 |
|
2020 |
Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't |
2021 |
have to do anything to activate it. |
2022 |
|
2023 |
** The default binding of the Delete key has changed. |
2024 |
|
2025 |
The new user-option `normal-erase-is-backspace' can be set to |
2026 |
determine the effect of the Delete and Backspace function keys. |
2027 |
|
2028 |
On window systems, the default value of this option is chosen |
2029 |
according to the keyboard used. If the keyboard has both a Backspace |
2030 |
key and a Delete key, and both are mapped to their usual meanings, the |
2031 |
option's default value is set to t, so that Backspace can be used to |
2032 |
delete backward, and Delete can be used to delete forward. On |
2033 |
keyboards which either have only one key (usually labeled DEL), or two |
2034 |
keys DEL and BS which produce the same effect, the option's value is |
2035 |
set to nil, and these keys delete backward. |
2036 |
|
2037 |
If not running under a window system, setting this option accomplishes |
2038 |
a similar effect by mapping C-h, which is usually generated by the |
2039 |
Backspace key, to DEL, and by mapping DEL to C-d via |
2040 |
`keyboard-translate'. The former functionality of C-h is available on |
2041 |
the F1 key. You should probably not use this setting on a text-only |
2042 |
terminal if you don't have both Backspace, Delete and F1 keys. |
2043 |
|
2044 |
Programmatically, you can call function normal-erase-is-backspace-mode |
2045 |
to toggle the behavior of the Delete and Backspace keys. |
2046 |
|
2047 |
** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been |
2048 |
changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a |
2049 |
buffer by default. |
2050 |
|
2051 |
** The <home> and <end> keys now move to the beginning or end of the |
2052 |
current line, respectively. C-<home> and C-<end> move to the |
2053 |
beginning and end of the buffer. |
2054 |
|
2055 |
** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the |
2056 |
recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is |
2057 |
signaled. |
2058 |
|
2059 |
** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init |
2060 |
file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer. |
2061 |
|
2062 |
** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't |
2063 |
compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change |
2064 |
this behavior. |
2065 |
|
2066 |
The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs's byte |
2067 |
compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let |
2068 |
Emacs dump core. |
2069 |
|
2070 |
** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus. |
2071 |
|
2072 |
When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit |
2073 |
widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for |
2074 |
Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif. |
2075 |
|
2076 |
** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is |
2077 |
more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is |
2078 |
now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus. |
2079 |
|
2080 |
** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set |
2081 |
using that menu. |
2082 |
|
2083 |
** Highlighting of trailing whitespace. |
2084 |
|
2085 |
When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing |
2086 |
whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is |
2087 |
defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy |
2088 |
highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not |
2089 |
displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the |
2090 |
whitespace. |
2091 |
|
2092 |
** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes |
2093 |
all frames except the selected one. |
2094 |
|
2095 |
** The new user-option `confirm-kill-emacs' can be customized to |
2096 |
let Emacs ask for confirmation before exiting. |
2097 |
|
2098 |
** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs |
2099 |
header-line (which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), |
2100 |
so that it remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. |
2101 |
This behavior may be disabled by customizing the option |
2102 |
`Info-use-header-line'. |
2103 |
|
2104 |
** Polish, Czech, German, and French translations of Emacs' reference card |
2105 |
have been added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex', `cs-refcard.tex', |
2106 |
`de-refcard.tex' and `fr-refcard.tex'. Postscript files are included. |
2107 |
|
2108 |
** An `Emacs Survival Guide', etc/survival.tex, is available. |
2109 |
|
2110 |
** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is |
2111 |
`dired-ref.tex'. A French translation is available in |
2112 |
`fr-drdref.tex'. |
2113 |
|
2114 |
** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not |
2115 |
displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the |
2116 |
menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode |
2117 |
menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu. |
2118 |
|
2119 |
** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable through Customize. |
2120 |
|
2121 |
You can no longer use `M-x customize-variable' to customize `load-path' |
2122 |
because it now contains a version-dependent component. You can still |
2123 |
use `add-to-list' and `setq' to customize this variable in your |
2124 |
`~/.emacs' init file or to modify it from any Lisp program in general. |
2125 |
|
2126 |
** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at |
2127 |
point in a pop-up window. |
2128 |
|
2129 |
** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse) |
2130 |
under XFree86. To enable this, use the `mouse-wheel-mode' command, or |
2131 |
customize the variable `mouse-wheel-mode'. |
2132 |
|
2133 |
The variables `mouse-wheel-follow-mouse' and `mouse-wheel-scroll-amount' |
2134 |
determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled. |
2135 |
|
2136 |
** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a |
2137 |
sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory. |
2138 |
(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.) |
2139 |
You can customize `auto-save-list-file-prefix' to change this location. |
2140 |
|
2141 |
** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively. |
2142 |
|
2143 |
** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil |
2144 |
to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights. |
2145 |
|
2146 |
** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the |
2147 |
trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add |
2148 |
this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'. |
2149 |
|
2150 |
** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will |
2151 |
be added to the end of the buffer even if `require-final-newline' is |
2152 |
non-nil. |
2153 |
|
2154 |
** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be |
2155 |
set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a |
2156 |
file that is already visited under a different name. |
2157 |
|
2158 |
** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to |
2159 |
nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size. |
2160 |
|
2161 |
** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name |
2162 |
and displays information about that. |
2163 |
|
2164 |
** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular |
2165 |
expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination. |
2166 |
|
2167 |
This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to |
2168 |
determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a |
2169 |
mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be |
2170 |
interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the |
2171 |
regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode |
2172 |
associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'. |
2173 |
|
2174 |
** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is |
2175 |
suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'. |
2176 |
|
2177 |
** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if |
2178 |
buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer |
2179 |
contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or |
2180 |
by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and |
2181 |
insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment, |
2182 |
the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding. |
2183 |
Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system. |
2184 |
|
2185 |
** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have |
2186 |
been removed -- use `set-language-environment'. |
2187 |
|
2188 |
** The new Custom option `keyboard-coding-system' specifies a coding |
2189 |
system for keyboard input. |
2190 |
|
2191 |
** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs' |
2192 |
coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's |
2193 |
escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores |
2194 |
such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is |
2195 |
recommended not to change it except for the special case that you |
2196 |
always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to |
2197 |
read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c |
2198 |
(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1 |
2199 |
RET C-x C-f filename RET. |
2200 |
|
2201 |
** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the |
2202 |
environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'. |
2203 |
|
2204 |
** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and |
2205 |
displays all characters in that character set. |
2206 |
|
2207 |
** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based |
2208 |
coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8. |
2209 |
|
2210 |
** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment |
2211 |
and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the |
2212 |
LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup. |
2213 |
|
2214 |
** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'. |
2215 |
Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets |
2216 |
8859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign). |
2217 |
GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet but recent X releases have |
2218 |
8859-15. See etc/INSTALL for information on obtaining extra fonts. |
2219 |
There are new Leim input methods for Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix (only) |
2220 |
and Polish `slash'. |
2221 |
|
2222 |
** New language environments `Dutch' and `Spanish'. |
2223 |
These new environments mainly select appropriate translations |
2224 |
of the tutorial. |
2225 |
|
2226 |
** In Ethiopic language environment, special key bindings for |
2227 |
function keys are changed as follows. This is to conform to "Emacs |
2228 |
Lisp Coding Convention". |
2229 |
|
2230 |
new command old-binding |
2231 |
--- ------- ----------- |
2232 |
f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-buffer f5 |
2233 |
S-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-region f5 |
2234 |
C-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-mail-or-marker f5 |
2235 |
|
2236 |
f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-buffer unchanged |
2237 |
S-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-region unchanged |
2238 |
C-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-mail-or-marker unchanged |
2239 |
|
2240 |
S-f5 ethio-toggle-punctuation f3 |
2241 |
S-f6 ethio-modify-vowel f6 |
2242 |
S-f7 ethio-replace-space f7 |
2243 |
S-f8 ethio-input-special-character f8 |
2244 |
S-f9 ethio-replace-space unchanged |
2245 |
C-f9 ethio-toggle-space f2 |
2246 |
|
2247 |
** There are new Leim input methods. |
2248 |
New input methods "turkish-postfix", "turkish-alt-postfix", |
2249 |
"greek-mizuochi", "TeX", and "greek-babel" are now part of the Leim |
2250 |
package. |
2251 |
|
2252 |
** The rule of input method "slovak" is slightly changed. Now the |
2253 |
rules for translating "q" and "Q" to "`" (backquote) are deleted, thus |
2254 |
typing them inserts "q" and "Q" respectively. Rules for translating |
2255 |
"=q", "+q", "=Q", and "+Q" to "`" are also deleted. Now, to input |
2256 |
"`", you must type "=q". |
2257 |
|
2258 |
** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO |
2259 |
8859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display |
2260 |
more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of |
2261 |
empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a |
2262 |
window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this |
2263 |
on. |
2264 |
|
2265 |
** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based |
2266 |
on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill, |
2267 |
defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region |
2268 |
commenting with the variable `comment-style'. |
2269 |
|
2270 |
** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and |
2271 |
`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail |
2272 |
indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the |
2273 |
indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive. |
2274 |
|
2275 |
** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines |
2276 |
on the display using several methods |
2277 |
|
2278 |
- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be |
2279 |
a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should |
2280 |
be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames. |
2281 |
|
2282 |
- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is |
2283 |
equivalent to specifying the frame parameter. |
2284 |
|
2285 |
- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line. |
2286 |
|
2287 |
- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is |
2288 |
the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only. |
2289 |
|
2290 |
** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create |
2291 |
an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The |
2292 |
command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c, |
2293 |
does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window. |
2294 |
|
2295 |
** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and |
2296 |
`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups, |
2297 |
typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory. |
2298 |
|
2299 |
** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1 |
2300 |
characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities. |
2301 |
|
2302 |
** New X resources recognized |
2303 |
|
2304 |
*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies |
2305 |
whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode |
2306 |
is useful for debugging X problems. |
2307 |
|
2308 |
Example: |
2309 |
|
2310 |
emacs.synchronous: true |
2311 |
|
2312 |
*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the |
2313 |
visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of |
2314 |
the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class, |
2315 |
and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid |
2316 |
visual class names are |
2317 |
|
2318 |
TrueColor |
2319 |
PseudoColor |
2320 |
DirectColor |
2321 |
StaticColor |
2322 |
GrayScale |
2323 |
StaticGray |
2324 |
|
2325 |
Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e. |
2326 |
`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same |
2327 |
meaning. |
2328 |
|
2329 |
The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes |
2330 |
supported on your display, and which depths they have. If |
2331 |
`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default |
2332 |
visual. |
2333 |
|
2334 |
Example: |
2335 |
|
2336 |
emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8 |
2337 |
|
2338 |
*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap', |
2339 |
specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the |
2340 |
default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized |
2341 |
resource values are `true' or `on'. |
2342 |
|
2343 |
Example: |
2344 |
|
2345 |
emacs.privateColormap: true |
2346 |
|
2347 |
** Faces and frame parameters. |
2348 |
|
2349 |
There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'. |
2350 |
Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and |
2351 |
`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face |
2352 |
`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color' |
2353 |
sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise |
2354 |
for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame |
2355 |
parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'. |
2356 |
|
2357 |
Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the |
2358 |
`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters |
2359 |
`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the |
2360 |
`default' face and vice versa. |
2361 |
|
2362 |
** New face `menu'. |
2363 |
|
2364 |
The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus. |
2365 |
|
2366 |
** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction. |
2367 |
|
2368 |
The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for |
2369 |
colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma |
2370 |
correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies |
2371 |
the screen gamma of a frame's display. |
2372 |
|
2373 |
PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result |
2374 |
in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD |
2375 |
color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2). |
2376 |
|
2377 |
The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class |
2378 |
`ScreenGamma'. |
2379 |
|
2380 |
** Tabs and variable-width text. |
2381 |
|
2382 |
Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is |
2383 |
defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is |
2384 |
independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears. |
2385 |
Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts. |
2386 |
|
2387 |
** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar |
2388 |
|
2389 |
*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin". |
2390 |
|
2391 |
emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5 |
2392 |
|
2393 |
The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the |
2394 |
LessTif/Motif one. |
2395 |
|
2396 |
*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in |
2397 |
LessTif and Motif. |
2398 |
|
2399 |
** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X. |
2400 |
|
2401 |
As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be |
2402 |
drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set |
2403 |
`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value. |
2404 |
|
2405 |
** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a |
2406 |
bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi and Less). |
2407 |
|
2408 |
This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable |
2409 |
`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this |
2410 |
variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'. |
2411 |
|
2412 |
** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method. |
2413 |
|
2414 |
When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the |
2415 |
value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a |
2416 |
number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that |
2417 |
fraction of the window's height from the top of the window. |
2418 |
|
2419 |
When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the |
2420 |
value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggressively' is a |
2421 |
number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that |
2422 |
fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window. |
2423 |
|
2424 |
** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either |
2425 |
M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET. |
2426 |
M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special |
2427 |
buffers. |
2428 |
|
2429 |
** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history. |
2430 |
|
2431 |
** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows |
2432 |
abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing |
2433 |
`directory-abbrev-alist'. |
2434 |
|
2435 |
** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives |
2436 |
the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be |
2437 |
forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this |
2438 |
value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system |
2439 |
users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership, |
2440 |
even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them. |
2441 |
|
2442 |
The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature. |
2443 |
|
2444 |
** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces, |
2445 |
notably at the end of lines. |
2446 |
|
2447 |
All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted |
2448 |
spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way. |
2449 |
|
2450 |
** The function `replace-rectangle' is an alias for `string-rectangle'. |
2451 |
|
2452 |
** The new command M-x string-insert-rectangle is like `string-rectangle', |
2453 |
but inserts text instead of replacing it. |
2454 |
|
2455 |
** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like |
2456 |
query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated |
2457 |
after each match to get the replacement text. |
2458 |
|
2459 |
** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets |
2460 |
you edit the replacement string. |
2461 |
|
2462 |
** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB' |
2463 |
(if you load the library `mailabbrev'), lets you complete mail aliases |
2464 |
in the text, analogous to lisp-complete-symbol. |
2465 |
|
2466 |
** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value. |
2467 |
|
2468 |
** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set |
2469 |
to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it. |
2470 |
|
2471 |
** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains |
2472 |
the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and |
2473 |
MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus |
2474 |
displayed by Emacs now have help strings. |
2475 |
|
2476 |
-- |
2477 |
** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to |
2478 |
read mail from the menu etc. |
2479 |
|
2480 |
** The environment variable `EMACSLOCKDIR' is no longer used on MS-Windows. |
2481 |
This environment variable was used when creating lock files. Emacs on |
2482 |
MS-Windows does not use this variable anymore. This change was made |
2483 |
before Emacs 21.1, but wasn't documented until now. |
2484 |
|
2485 |
** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the |
2486 |
MS-DOS version of Emacs. |
2487 |
|
2488 |
** The new command `msdos-set-mouse-buttons' forces the MS-DOS version |
2489 |
of Emacs to behave as if the mouse had a specified number of buttons. |
2490 |
This comes handy with mice that don't report their number of buttons |
2491 |
correctly. One example is the wheeled mice, which report 3 buttons, |
2492 |
but clicks on the middle button are not passed to the MS-DOS version |
2493 |
of Emacs. |
2494 |
|
2495 |
** Customize changes |
2496 |
|
2497 |
*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the |
2498 |
`State' menu to add comments, or give a prefix argument to |
2499 |
M-x customize-set-variable or M-x customize-set-value. Note that |
2500 |
customization comments will cause the customizations to fail in |
2501 |
earlier versions of Emacs. |
2502 |
|
2503 |
*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill |
2504 |
Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the |
2505 |
default). |
2506 |
|
2507 |
*** If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options, it |
2508 |
does not allow you to save customizations in your `~/.emacs' init |
2509 |
file. This is because saving customizations from such a session would |
2510 |
wipe out all the other customizationss you might have on your init |
2511 |
file. |
2512 |
|
2513 |
** If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options, it |
2514 |
does not save disabled and enabled commands for future sessions, to |
2515 |
avoid overwriting existing customizations of this kind that are |
2516 |
already in your init file. |
2517 |
|
2518 |
** New features in evaluation commands |
2519 |
|
2520 |
*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp |
2521 |
modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables |
2522 |
print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the new |
2523 |
customizable variables eval-expression-print-level, |
2524 |
eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error. |
2525 |
|
2526 |
The default values for the first two of these variables are 12 and 4 |
2527 |
respectively, which means that `eval-expression' now prints at most |
2528 |
the first 12 members of a list and at most 4 nesting levels deep (if |
2529 |
the list is longer or deeper than that, an ellipsis `...' is |
2530 |
printed). |
2531 |
|
2532 |
<RET> or <mouse-2> on the printed text toggles between an abbreviated |
2533 |
printed representation and an unabbreviated one. |
2534 |
|
2535 |
The default value of eval-expression-debug-on-error is t, so any error |
2536 |
during evaluation produces a backtrace. |
2537 |
|
2538 |
*** The function `eval-defun' (C-M-x) now loads Edebug and instruments |
2539 |
code when called with a prefix argument. |
2540 |
|
2541 |
** CC mode changes. |
2542 |
|
2543 |
Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with |
2544 |
current user setups (although it's believed that these |
2545 |
incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances). |
2546 |
However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled |
2547 |
back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward |
2548 |
compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this |
2549 |
release. |
2550 |
|
2551 |
*** The hardcoded switch to "java" style in Java mode is gone. |
2552 |
CC Mode used to automatically set the style to "java" when Java mode |
2553 |
is entered. This has now been removed since it caused too much |
2554 |
confusion. |
2555 |
|
2556 |
However, to keep backward compatibility to a certain extent, the |
2557 |
default value for c-default-style now specifies the "java" style for |
2558 |
java-mode, but "gnu" for all other modes (as before). So you won't |
2559 |
notice the change if you haven't touched that variable. |
2560 |
|
2561 |
*** New cleanups, space-before-funcall and compact-empty-funcall. |
2562 |
Two new cleanups have been added to c-cleanup-list: |
2563 |
|
2564 |
space-before-funcall causes a space to be inserted before the opening |
2565 |
parenthesis of a function call, which gives the style "foo (bar)". |
2566 |
|
2567 |
compact-empty-funcall causes any space before a function call opening |
2568 |
parenthesis to be removed if there are no arguments to the function. |
2569 |
It's typically useful together with space-before-funcall to get the |
2570 |
style "foo (bar)" and "foo()". |
2571 |
|
2572 |
*** Some keywords now automatically trigger reindentation. |
2573 |
Keywords like "else", "while", "catch" and "finally" have been made |
2574 |
"electric" to make them reindent automatically when they continue an |
2575 |
earlier statement. An example: |
2576 |
|
2577 |
for (i = 0; i < 17; i++) |
2578 |
if (a[i]) |
2579 |
res += a[i]->offset; |
2580 |
else |
2581 |
|
2582 |
Here, the "else" should be indented like the preceding "if", since it |
2583 |
continues that statement. CC Mode will automatically reindent it after |
2584 |
the "else" has been typed in full, since it's not until then it's |
2585 |
possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a continuation of |
2586 |
the preceding "if". |
2587 |
|
2588 |
CC Mode uses Abbrev mode to achieve this, which is therefore turned on |
2589 |
by default. |
2590 |
|
2591 |
*** M-a and M-e now moves by sentence in multiline strings. |
2592 |
Previously these two keys only moved by sentence in comments, which |
2593 |
meant that sentence movement didn't work in strings containing |
2594 |
documentation or other natural language text. |
2595 |
|
2596 |
The reason it's only activated in multiline strings (i.e. strings that |
2597 |
contain a newline, even when escaped by a '\') is to avoid stopping in |
2598 |
the short strings that often reside inside statements. Multiline |
2599 |
strings almost always contain text in a natural language, as opposed |
2600 |
to other strings that typically contain format specifications, |
2601 |
commands, etc. Also, it's not that bothersome that M-a and M-e misses |
2602 |
sentences in single line strings, since they're short anyway. |
2603 |
|
2604 |
*** Support for autodoc comments in Pike mode. |
2605 |
Autodoc comments for Pike are used to extract documentation from the |
2606 |
source, like Javadoc in Java. Pike mode now recognize this markup in |
2607 |
comment prefixes and paragraph starts. |
2608 |
|
2609 |
*** The comment prefix regexps on c-comment-prefix may be mode specific. |
2610 |
When c-comment-prefix is an association list, it specifies the comment |
2611 |
line prefix on a per-mode basis, like c-default-style does. This |
2612 |
change came about to support the special autodoc comment prefix in |
2613 |
Pike mode only. |
2614 |
|
2615 |
*** Better handling of syntactic errors. |
2616 |
The recovery after unbalanced parens earlier in the buffer has been |
2617 |
improved; CC Mode now reports them by dinging and giving a message |
2618 |
stating the offending line, but still recovers and indent the |
2619 |
following lines in a sane way (most of the time). An "else" with no |
2620 |
matching "if" is handled similarly. If an error is discovered while |
2621 |
indenting a region, the whole region is still indented and the error |
2622 |
is reported afterwards. |
2623 |
|
2624 |
*** Lineup functions may now return absolute columns. |
2625 |
A lineup function can give an absolute column to indent the line to by |
2626 |
returning a vector with the desired column as the first element. |
2627 |
|
2628 |
*** More robust and warning-free byte compilation. |
2629 |
Although this is strictly not a user visible change (well, depending |
2630 |
on the view of a user), it's still worth mentioning that CC Mode now |
2631 |
can be compiled in the standard ways without causing trouble. Some |
2632 |
code have also been moved between the subpackages to enhance the |
2633 |
modularity somewhat. Thanks to Martin Buchholz for doing the |
2634 |
groundwork. |
2635 |
|
2636 |
*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t. |
2637 |
This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior |
2638 |
of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for |
2639 |
non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might |
2640 |
want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't |
2641 |
have to bother. |
2642 |
|
2643 |
Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing |
2644 |
situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally |
2645 |
and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session. |
2646 |
If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of |
2647 |
the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java" |
2648 |
by default) to override the global settings made by the user. |
2649 |
|
2650 |
*** New initialization procedure for the style system. |
2651 |
When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the |
2652 |
variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now |
2653 |
take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This |
2654 |
is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific |
2655 |
settings would override the global settings. This change makes it |
2656 |
possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with |
2657 |
Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file. |
2658 |
|
2659 |
By default, the global value of every style variable is the new |
2660 |
special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from |
2661 |
the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting |
2662 |
of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described |
2663 |
above. |
2664 |
|
2665 |
Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only* |
2666 |
when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode |
2667 |
function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a |
2668 |
call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style --- |
2669 |
then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style |
2670 |
values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values |
2671 |
only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the |
2672 |
function documentation for more info. |
2673 |
|
2674 |
The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users, |
2675 |
especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or |
2676 |
with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is |
2677 |
intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well, |
2678 |
such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system |
2679 |
is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current |
2680 |
configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and |
2681 |
global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set. |
2682 |
|
2683 |
(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.) |
2684 |
|
2685 |
**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable. |
2686 |
This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior. |
2687 |
|
2688 |
This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style |
2689 |
variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be |
2690 |
completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when |
2691 |
the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the |
2692 |
empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the |
2693 |
style system. |
2694 |
|
2695 |
**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior. |
2696 |
In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set |
2697 |
c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back |
2698 |
as far as possible. |
2699 |
|
2700 |
*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling. |
2701 |
CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the |
2702 |
surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new |
2703 |
chapter about this in the manual. |
2704 |
|
2705 |
**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations. |
2706 |
The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly |
2707 |
recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's |
2708 |
primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and |
2709 |
adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses. |
2710 |
|
2711 |
**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix. |
2712 |
This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable |
2713 |
c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings. |
2714 |
|
2715 |
**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode. |
2716 |
This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments. |
2717 |
|
2718 |
It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC |
2719 |
Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/). |
2720 |
A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use |
2721 |
inside CC Mode. |
2722 |
|
2723 |
Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that |
2724 |
causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match |
2725 |
the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is |
2726 |
available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/ |
2727 |
cc-mode/). |
2728 |
|
2729 |
**** The variables `c-hanging-comment-starter-p' and |
2730 |
`c-hanging-comment-ender-p', which controlled how comment starters and |
2731 |
enders were filled, are not used anymore. The new version of the |
2732 |
function `c-fill-paragraph' keeps the comment starters and enders as |
2733 |
they were before the filling. |
2734 |
|
2735 |
**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling. |
2736 |
The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in |
2737 |
specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string |
2738 |
literals. |
2739 |
|
2740 |
**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break. |
2741 |
It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line |
2742 |
prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If |
2743 |
you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to |
2744 |
this function. |
2745 |
|
2746 |
*** Fixes to IDL mode. |
2747 |
It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant |
2748 |
to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a |
2749 |
struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword. |
2750 |
Thanks to Eric Eide. |
2751 |
|
2752 |
*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style. |
2753 |
It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when |
2754 |
opening braces hangs and when they don't. |
2755 |
|
2756 |
**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block. |
2757 |
|
2758 |
*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block. |
2759 |
See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a |
2760 |
better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates, |
2761 |
and is used by default to line up continued template arguments. |
2762 |
|
2763 |
*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the |
2764 |
previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in |
2765 |
the column specified by comment-column. |
2766 |
|
2767 |
*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments. |
2768 |
In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation |
2769 |
is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line |
2770 |
prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that |
2771 |
contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally |
2772 |
don't want CC Mode to change the indentation. |
2773 |
|
2774 |
*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start |
2775 |
instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup |
2776 |
arguments. |
2777 |
|
2778 |
*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings. |
2779 |
|
2780 |
*** More preprocessor directive movement functions. |
2781 |
c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional. |
2782 |
c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are |
2783 |
variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don |
2784 |
Provan). |
2785 |
|
2786 |
*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations. |
2787 |
|
2788 |
** Dired changes |
2789 |
|
2790 |
*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete |
2791 |
command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default |
2792 |
is, delete only empty directories. |
2793 |
|
2794 |
*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy |
2795 |
command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not |
2796 |
copy directories recursively. |
2797 |
|
2798 |
*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?' |
2799 |
in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with |
2800 |
the difference that the command will be run on each file individually. |
2801 |
|
2802 |
*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a') |
2803 |
replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or |
2804 |
directory. |
2805 |
|
2806 |
*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `y') shows |
2807 |
a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on. |
2808 |
This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so |
2809 |
will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as |
2810 |
accurate or inaccurate as it is. |
2811 |
|
2812 |
*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R' |
2813 |
from ls switches. |
2814 |
|
2815 |
*** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use |
2816 |
of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename, |
2817 |
which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single |
2818 |
source file, not when operating on multiple marked files. |
2819 |
|
2820 |
** Gnus changes. |
2821 |
|
2822 |
The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in |
2823 |
four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment, |
2824 |
internationalization and mail-fetching. |
2825 |
|
2826 |
*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the |
2827 |
many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone. |
2828 |
|
2829 |
If you used procmail like in |
2830 |
|
2831 |
(setq nnmail-use-procmail t) |
2832 |
(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail) |
2833 |
(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/") |
2834 |
(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in") |
2835 |
|
2836 |
this now has changed to |
2837 |
|
2838 |
(setq mail-sources |
2839 |
'((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/" |
2840 |
:suffix ".in"))) |
2841 |
|
2842 |
More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods -> |
2843 |
Getting Mail -> Mail Sources |
2844 |
|
2845 |
*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of |
2846 |
Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details. |
2847 |
Separate MIME packages like RMIME, mime-compose etc., will probably no |
2848 |
longer work; remove them and use the native facilities. |
2849 |
|
2850 |
The FLIM/SEMI package still works with Emacs 21, but if you want to |
2851 |
use the native facilities, you must remove any mailcap.el[c] that was |
2852 |
installed by FLIM/SEMI version 1.13 or earlier. |
2853 |
|
2854 |
*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many |
2855 |
parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There |
2856 |
are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is |
2857 |
now just a compatibility layer. |
2858 |
|
2859 |
*** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in |
2860 |
Gnus facilities. |
2861 |
|
2862 |
*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be |
2863 |
called to position point. |
2864 |
|
2865 |
*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in |
2866 |
summary buffers and NOV files. |
2867 |
|
2868 |
*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number |
2869 |
of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added. |
2870 |
|
2871 |
*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a |
2872 |
subtly different manner. |
2873 |
|
2874 |
*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive |
2875 |
and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with |
2876 |
ever-changing layouts. |
2877 |
|
2878 |
*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap. |
2879 |
|
2880 |
*** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support. |
2881 |
|
2882 |
** Changes in Texinfo mode. |
2883 |
|
2884 |
*** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo |
2885 |
macros |
2886 |
|
2887 |
Key binding Macro |
2888 |
------------------------- |
2889 |
C-c C-c C-s @strong |
2890 |
C-c C-c C-e @emph |
2891 |
C-c C-c u @uref |
2892 |
C-c C-c q @quotation |
2893 |
C-c C-c m @email |
2894 |
C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block> |
2895 |
M-RET @item |
2896 |
|
2897 |
*** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context. |
2898 |
|
2899 |
** Changes in Outline mode. |
2900 |
|
2901 |
There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command |
2902 |
`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to |
2903 |
the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents. |
2904 |
|
2905 |
** Changes to Emacs Server |
2906 |
|
2907 |
*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do |
2908 |
with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers |
2909 |
are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with |
2910 |
Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which |
2911 |
buffers to kill, as before. |
2912 |
|
2913 |
Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client, |
2914 |
i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in |
2915 |
this way. |
2916 |
|
2917 |
** Both emacsclient and Emacs itself now accept command line options |
2918 |
of the form +LINE:COLUMN in addition to +LINE. |
2919 |
|
2920 |
** Changes to Show Paren mode. |
2921 |
|
2922 |
*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property. |
2923 |
The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to |
2924 |
use. Default is 1000. |
2925 |
|
2926 |
** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren |
2927 |
groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes). |
2928 |
|
2929 |
** Changes to hideshow.el |
2930 |
|
2931 |
*** Generalized block selection and traversal |
2932 |
|
2933 |
A block is now recognized by its start and end regexps (both strings), |
2934 |
and an integer specifying which sub-expression in the start regexp |
2935 |
serves as the place where a `forward-sexp'-like function can operate. |
2936 |
See the documentation of variable `hs-special-modes-alist'. |
2937 |
|
2938 |
*** During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, |
2939 |
hidden blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' can |
2940 |
be used in the mode line format to show the line at the beginning of |
2941 |
the open block. |
2942 |
|
2943 |
*** User option `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' specifies a |
2944 |
function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead of |
2945 |
the normal block-hiding function. |
2946 |
|
2947 |
*** The command `hs-show-region' has been removed. |
2948 |
|
2949 |
*** The key bindings have changed to fit the Emacs conventions, |
2950 |
roughly imitating those of Outline minor mode. Notably, the prefix |
2951 |
for all bindings is now `C-c @'. For details, see the documentation |
2952 |
for `hs-minor-mode'. |
2953 |
|
2954 |
*** The variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' has been removed, and |
2955 |
hideshow.el now always behaves as if this variable were set to t. |
2956 |
|
2957 |
** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions |
2958 |
|
2959 |
*** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes |
2960 |
an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making |
2961 |
log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions. |
2962 |
|
2963 |
**** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the |
2964 |
current buffer. |
2965 |
|
2966 |
*** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries |
2967 |
in a log file. |
2968 |
|
2969 |
*** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log |
2970 |
entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil. |
2971 |
Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's |
2972 |
version number is performed based on regular expressions from |
2973 |
`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be customized. |
2974 |
Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file. |
2975 |
|
2976 |
*** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting. |
2977 |
|
2978 |
** Changes to cmuscheme |
2979 |
|
2980 |
*** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed |
2981 |
`cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el. |
2982 |
|
2983 |
** Changes in Font Lock |
2984 |
|
2985 |
*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove |
2986 |
font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode. |
2987 |
|
2988 |
*** Multi-line patterns are now supported. Modes using this, should |
2989 |
set font-lock-multiline to t in their font-lock-defaults. |
2990 |
|
2991 |
*** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose |
2992 |
the face used for each string/comment. |
2993 |
|
2994 |
*** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'. |
2995 |
Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code". |
2996 |
|
2997 |
** Changes to Shell mode |
2998 |
|
2999 |
*** The `shell' command now accepts an optional argument to specify the buffer |
3000 |
to use, which defaults to "*shell*". When used interactively, a |
3001 |
non-default buffer may be specified by giving the `shell' command a |
3002 |
prefix argument (causing it to prompt for the buffer name). |
3003 |
|
3004 |
** Comint (subshell) changes |
3005 |
|
3006 |
These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which |
3007 |
include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc. |
3008 |
|
3009 |
*** Comint now by default interprets some carriage-control characters. |
3010 |
Comint now removes CRs from CR LF sequences, and treats single CRs and |
3011 |
BSs in the output in a way similar to a terminal (by deleting to the |
3012 |
beginning of the line, or deleting the previous character, |
3013 |
respectively). This is achieved by adding `comint-carriage-motion' to |
3014 |
the `comint-output-filter-functions' hook by default. |
3015 |
|
3016 |
*** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp' |
3017 |
to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which |
3018 |
parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the |
3019 |
user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use |
3020 |
this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line, |
3021 |
respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this |
3022 |
feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option |
3023 |
`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'. |
3024 |
|
3025 |
*** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes |
3026 |
and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers. |
3027 |
|
3028 |
*** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and |
3029 |
buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current |
3030 |
buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer. |
3031 |
|
3032 |
The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like |
3033 |
M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of |
3034 |
the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer. |
3035 |
|
3036 |
*** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts, |
3037 |
and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features, |
3038 |
see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'. |
3039 |
|
3040 |
*** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s') |
3041 |
saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix |
3042 |
argument, it appends to the file. |
3043 |
|
3044 |
*** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output' |
3045 |
(usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for |
3046 |
compatibility. |
3047 |
|
3048 |
*** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input |
3049 |
ring (history). |
3050 |
|
3051 |
*** The new variable `comint-input-history-ignore' is a regexp for |
3052 |
identifying history lines that should be ignored, like tcsh time-stamp |
3053 |
strings, starting with a `#'. The default value of this variable is "^#". |
3054 |
|
3055 |
** Changes to Rmail mode |
3056 |
|
3057 |
*** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be |
3058 |
set to fine tune the identification of the correspondent when |
3059 |
receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the |
3060 |
recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default, |
3061 |
`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself |
3062 |
as correspondent. |
3063 |
|
3064 |
Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect |
3065 |
mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a |
3066 |
regexp matching your mail addresses. |
3067 |
|
3068 |
*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how |
3069 |
to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an |
3070 |
Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation |
3071 |
with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask |
3072 |
for confirmation with yes-or-no-p. |
3073 |
|
3074 |
*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg, |
3075 |
like `j'. |
3076 |
|
3077 |
*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that |
3078 |
specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a |
3079 |
digest message. |
3080 |
|
3081 |
*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies |
3082 |
in which folder to put messages automatically. |
3083 |
|
3084 |
*** The new function `rmail-redecode-body' allows to fix a message |
3085 |
with non-ASCII characters if Emacs happens to decode it incorrectly |
3086 |
due to missing or malformed "charset=" header. |
3087 |
|
3088 |
** The new user-option `mail-envelope-from' can be used to specify |
3089 |
an envelope-from address different from user-mail-address. |
3090 |
|
3091 |
** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to |
3092 |
use the -f option when sending mail. |
3093 |
|
3094 |
** The Rmail command `o' (`rmail-output-to-rmail-file') now writes the |
3095 |
current message in the internal `emacs-mule' encoding, rather than in |
3096 |
the encoding taken from the variable `buffer-file-coding-system'. |
3097 |
This allows to save messages whose characters cannot be safely encoded |
3098 |
by the buffer's coding system, and makes sure the message will be |
3099 |
displayed correctly when you later visit the target Rmail file. |
3100 |
|
3101 |
If you want your Rmail files be encoded in a specific coding system |
3102 |
other than `emacs-mule', you can customize the variable |
3103 |
`rmail-file-coding-system' to set its value to that coding system. |
3104 |
|
3105 |
** Changes to TeX mode |
3106 |
|
3107 |
*** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to |
3108 |
`latex-mode'. |
3109 |
|
3110 |
*** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm. |
3111 |
|
3112 |
*** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs. |
3113 |
|
3114 |
*** Added support for outline-minor-mode. |
3115 |
|
3116 |
** Changes to RefTeX mode |
3117 |
|
3118 |
*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be |
3119 |
created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys. |
3120 |
Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default |
3121 |
macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically |
3122 |
sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries |
3123 |
can be edited from that buffer. |
3124 |
|
3125 |
*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several |
3126 |
items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or |
3127 |
`A' to use all marked entries). |
3128 |
|
3129 |
*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce |
3130 |
memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used. |
3131 |
|
3132 |
*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &' |
3133 |
in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order |
3134 |
to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has |
3135 |
been cited. |
3136 |
|
3137 |
** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings. |
3138 |
The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading |
3139 |
semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `(' |
3140 |
in column 1 are always made leaves. |
3141 |
|
3142 |
** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks) |
3143 |
has the following new features: |
3144 |
|
3145 |
*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern |
3146 |
may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like |
3147 |
to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable |
3148 |
time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns. |
3149 |
|
3150 |
*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This |
3151 |
feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source |
3152 |
file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the |
3153 |
compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching |
3154 |
pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it |
3155 |
defaults to 1. |
3156 |
|
3157 |
** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in |
3158 |
file names. |
3159 |
|
3160 |
** Ispell changes |
3161 |
|
3162 |
*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if |
3163 |
transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it |
3164 |
spell-checks the current buffer. |
3165 |
|
3166 |
*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been |
3167 |
added. |
3168 |
|
3169 |
*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling |
3170 |
correction is made and re-checked. |
3171 |
|
3172 |
*** An Italian, Portuguese, and Slovak dictionary definition has been added. |
3173 |
|
3174 |
*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some |
3175 |
cases. |
3176 |
|
3177 |
*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict |
3178 |
on syntax errors. |
3179 |
|
3180 |
*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the |
3181 |
end of the buffer. |
3182 |
|
3183 |
*** Spell checking now works in the MS-DOS version of Emacs. |
3184 |
|
3185 |
** Makefile mode changes |
3186 |
|
3187 |
*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'. |
3188 |
|
3189 |
*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when |
3190 |
Fontlock mode is active. |
3191 |
|
3192 |
** Isearch changes |
3193 |
|
3194 |
*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history, |
3195 |
so that searches can be resumed. |
3196 |
|
3197 |
*** In Isearch mode, C-M-s and C-M-r are now bound like C-s and C-r, |
3198 |
respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys |
3199 |
that started the search. |
3200 |
|
3201 |
*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current |
3202 |
selection into the search string rather than giving an error. |
3203 |
|
3204 |
*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search. |
3205 |
|
3206 |
Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable |
3207 |
`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current |
3208 |
search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as |
3209 |
before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are |
3210 |
highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to |
3211 |
`secondary-selection'. |
3212 |
|
3213 |
The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor |
3214 |
will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search. |
3215 |
Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion |
3216 |
using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its |
3217 |
usual snappy response. |
3218 |
|
3219 |
If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for |
3220 |
matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is |
3221 |
set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x |
3222 |
isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'. |
3223 |
|
3224 |
** VC Changes |
3225 |
|
3226 |
VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it |
3227 |
easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp |
3228 |
Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism |
3229 |
to enable and disable support for particular version systems has |
3230 |
changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable |
3231 |
`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of symbols that identify |
3232 |
version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file, |
3233 |
each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the |
3234 |
file is registered in that backend. |
3235 |
|
3236 |
When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed |
3237 |
backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the |
3238 |
directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for |
3239 |
master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then |
3240 |
the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen. |
3241 |
As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete. |
3242 |
|
3243 |
The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC |
3244 |
still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for |
3245 |
RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables |
3246 |
vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS |
3247 |
where it doesn't make sense.) |
3248 |
|
3249 |
The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also |
3250 |
obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude |
3251 |
`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now. |
3252 |
|
3253 |
*** General Changes |
3254 |
|
3255 |
The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding |
3256 |
checks are always done now. |
3257 |
|
3258 |
VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control |
3259 |
operations. |
3260 |
|
3261 |
`vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'. |
3262 |
`vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'. |
3263 |
`vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'. |
3264 |
|
3265 |
The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the |
3266 |
first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the |
3267 |
current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into |
3268 |
the working file (``merge news''). |
3269 |
|
3270 |
The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r |
3271 |
(vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work |
3272 |
downwards. |
3273 |
|
3274 |
*** Multiple Backends |
3275 |
|
3276 |
VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is |
3277 |
useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS |
3278 |
repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally |
3279 |
commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your |
3280 |
local RCS archives. |
3281 |
|
3282 |
To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example) |
3283 |
should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote'' |
3284 |
backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of |
3285 |
`vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.) |
3286 |
|
3287 |
You can then commit changes to another backend (say, RCS), by typing |
3288 |
C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a backend name as |
3289 |
a revision number). VC registers the file in the more local backend |
3290 |
if that hasn't already happened, and commits to a branch based on the |
3291 |
current revision number from the more remote backend. |
3292 |
|
3293 |
If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to |
3294 |
another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change |
3295 |
any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to |
3296 |
pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally. |
3297 |
|
3298 |
After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your |
3299 |
changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the |
3300 |
local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry |
3301 |
buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file. |
3302 |
|
3303 |
*** Changes for CVS |
3304 |
|
3305 |
There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the |
3306 |
default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in |
3307 |
remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined |
3308 |
by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a |
3309 |
regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts |
3310 |
that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC |
3311 |
queries the repository just as often as it does for local files. |
3312 |
|
3313 |
If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of |
3314 |
repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and |
3315 |
revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without |
3316 |
any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version |
3317 |
backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version |
3318 |
number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~ |
3319 |
(vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter |
3320 |
of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other, |
3321 |
the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted |
3322 |
automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS, |
3323 |
since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file |
3324 |
name.) |
3325 |
|
3326 |
If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the |
3327 |
repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit. |
3328 |
If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to |
3329 |
commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the |
3330 |
current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an |
3331 |
entire directory tree. |
3332 |
|
3333 |
The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call |
3334 |
"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option |
3335 |
is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are |
3336 |
"watched" by other developers.) |
3337 |
|
3338 |
The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r |
3339 |
(vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give |
3340 |
an empty snapshot name to the latter, that performs a `cvs update', |
3341 |
starting at the given directory. |
3342 |
|
3343 |
*** Lisp Changes in VC |
3344 |
|
3345 |
VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now |
3346 |
add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a |
3347 |
library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and |
3348 |
then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for |
3349 |
a version system named SYS, you write a library named vc-sys.el, which |
3350 |
provides a number of functions vc-sys-... (see commentary at the top |
3351 |
of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library, |
3352 |
you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the symbol |
3353 |
`SYS' to the list `vc-handled-backends'. |
3354 |
|
3355 |
** The customizable EDT emulation package now supports the EDT |
3356 |
SUBS command and EDT scroll margins. It also works with more |
3357 |
terminal/keyboard configurations and it now works under XEmacs. |
3358 |
See etc/edt-user.doc for more information. |
3359 |
|
3360 |
** New modes and packages |
3361 |
|
3362 |
*** The new global minor mode `minibuffer-electric-default-mode' |
3363 |
automatically hides the `(default ...)' part of minibuffer prompts when |
3364 |
the default is not applicable. |
3365 |
|
3366 |
*** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines, |
3367 |
rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The |
3368 |
shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \. |
3369 |
|
3370 |
Features are: |
3371 |
|
3372 |
- Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is |
3373 |
drawn, like this: | \ / |
3374 |
--+-- X |
3375 |
| / \ |
3376 |
|
3377 |
- Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the |
3378 |
result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If |
3379 |
your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a |
3380 |
pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will |
3381 |
then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line |
3382 |
you are drawing. |
3383 |
|
3384 |
- Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight) |
3385 |
poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >. |
3386 |
|
3387 |
- Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by |
3388 |
flood-filling. |
3389 |
|
3390 |
- Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular |
3391 |
regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be |
3392 |
turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in |
3393 |
artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa. |
3394 |
|
3395 |
- Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can |
3396 |
also do without the mouse. |
3397 |
|
3398 |
- Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to |
3399 |
reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares |
3400 |
and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your |
3401 |
ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio, |
3402 |
the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round. |
3403 |
|
3404 |
- Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented: |
3405 |
|
3406 |
lines straight-lines |
3407 |
rectangles squares |
3408 |
poly-lines straight poly-lines |
3409 |
ellipses circles |
3410 |
text (see-thru) text (overwrite) |
3411 |
spray-can setting size for spraying |
3412 |
vaporize line vaporize lines |
3413 |
erase characters erase rectangles |
3414 |
|
3415 |
Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or |
3416 |
diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in |
3417 |
the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while |
3418 |
drawing. |
3419 |
|
3420 |
It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines |
3421 |
(rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are |
3422 |
straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired |
3423 |
by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>. |
3424 |
|
3425 |
- Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this |
3426 |
can be turned off). |
3427 |
|
3428 |
*** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell |
3429 |
implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it. |
3430 |
It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp |
3431 |
functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports |
3432 |
history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It |
3433 |
will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of |
3434 |
the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been |
3435 |
rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell, |
3436 |
all within the scope of your Emacs process. |
3437 |
|
3438 |
*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time |
3439 |
intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the |
3440 |
typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working |
3441 |
on certain projects. |
3442 |
|
3443 |
*** The new package hi-lock.el provides commands to highlight matches |
3444 |
of interactively entered regexps. For example, |
3445 |
|
3446 |
M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET |
3447 |
|
3448 |
will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background |
3449 |
face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are |
3450 |
typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting. |
3451 |
Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of |
3452 |
appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the |
3453 |
current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the |
3454 |
corresponding file is read. There are commands to highlight matches |
3455 |
to phrases and to highlight entire lines containing a match. |
3456 |
|
3457 |
*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when |
3458 |
Emacs is idle. |
3459 |
|
3460 |
*** The new package tildify.el allows to add hard spaces or other text |
3461 |
fragments in accordance with the current major mode. |
3462 |
|
3463 |
*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML |
3464 |
parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however. |
3465 |
|
3466 |
*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el |
3467 |
package which allows different styles of comment-region and should |
3468 |
be more robust while offering the same functionality. |
3469 |
`comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only |
3470 |
comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary. |
3471 |
|
3472 |
*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags |
3473 |
facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a |
3474 |
separate Texinfo file. |
3475 |
|
3476 |
*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or |
3477 |
by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument) |
3478 |
provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with |
3479 |
`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to |
3480 |
enter check-in log messages. |
3481 |
|
3482 |
*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages |
3483 |
without invoking external programs. |
3484 |
|
3485 |
The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp |
3486 |
and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike |
3487 |
`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it |
3488 |
is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and |
3489 |
Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available. |
3490 |
|
3491 |
The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man |
3492 |
page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does. |
3493 |
|
3494 |
*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for |
3495 |
authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback. |
3496 |
|
3497 |
The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for |
3498 |
the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in |
3499 |
the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing. |
3500 |
Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so |
3501 |
even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a |
3502 |
single step. |
3503 |
|
3504 |
On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like |
3505 |
matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will |
3506 |
probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp |
3507 |
contains such to get feedback about their respective limits. |
3508 |
|
3509 |
*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes |
3510 |
unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without |
3511 |
actually modifying content of a buffer. |
3512 |
|
3513 |
*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in |
3514 |
PostScript. |
3515 |
|
3516 |
Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc. |
3517 |
|
3518 |
The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements: |
3519 |
|
3520 |
; comment (until end of line) |
3521 |
A non-terminal |
3522 |
"C" terminal |
3523 |
?C? special |
3524 |
$A default non-terminal |
3525 |
$"C" default terminal |
3526 |
$?C? default special |
3527 |
A = B. production (A is the header and B the body) |
3528 |
C D sequence (C occurs before D) |
3529 |
C | D alternative (C or D occurs) |
3530 |
A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal) |
3531 |
n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times) |
3532 |
(C) group (expression C is grouped together) |
3533 |
[C] optional (C may or not occurs) |
3534 |
C+ one or more occurrences of C |
3535 |
{C}+ one or more occurrences of C |
3536 |
{C}* zero or more occurrences of C |
3537 |
{C} zero or more occurrences of C |
3538 |
C / D equivalent to: C {D C}* |
3539 |
{C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}* |
3540 |
{C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*] |
3541 |
{C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*] |
3542 |
|
3543 |
Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it. |
3544 |
|
3545 |
*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x |
3546 |
align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions, |
3547 |
determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for |
3548 |
example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the |
3549 |
equal signs of assignments. |
3550 |
|
3551 |
*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting |
3552 |
paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'. |
3553 |
|
3554 |
*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to |
3555 |
list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a |
3556 |
buffer menu with this package. See the Custom group `bs'. |
3557 |
|
3558 |
*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp. |
3559 |
|
3560 |
*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to |
3561 |
replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it |
3562 |
is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators, |
3563 |
and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should |
3564 |
not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool |
3565 |
which answers different needs. |
3566 |
|
3567 |
*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights |
3568 |
suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside |
3569 |
expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of |
3570 |
course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with |
3571 |
reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode |
3572 |
to be enabled. |
3573 |
|
3574 |
*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files |
3575 |
containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS. |
3576 |
|
3577 |
*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game. |
3578 |
|
3579 |
*** hl-line.el provides `hl-line-mode', a minor mode to highlight the |
3580 |
current line in the current buffer. It also provides |
3581 |
`global-hl-line-mode' to provide the same behavior in all buffers. |
3582 |
|
3583 |
*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties. |
3584 |
|
3585 |
Please note: if `ansi-color-for-comint-mode' and |
3586 |
`global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will |
3587 |
disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to |
3588 |
`comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This |
3589 |
displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground |
3590 |
and background colors. |
3591 |
|
3592 |
*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object |
3593 |
Pascal) language. |
3594 |
|
3595 |
*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on |
3596 |
the text at point. |
3597 |
|
3598 |
*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases. |
3599 |
|
3600 |
*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures. |
3601 |
|
3602 |
*** whitespace.el is a package for warning about and cleaning bogus |
3603 |
whitespace in a file. |
3604 |
|
3605 |
*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript |
3606 |
files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including |
3607 |
(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for |
3608 |
interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and |
3609 |
often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out / |
3610 |
uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal |
3611 |
codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu. |
3612 |
|
3613 |
*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle. |
3614 |
|
3615 |
Here is an example of columns: |
3616 |
|
3617 |
horse apple bus |
3618 |
dog pineapple car EXTRA |
3619 |
porcupine strawberry airplane |
3620 |
|
3621 |
Doing the following settings: |
3622 |
|
3623 |
(setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ") |
3624 |
(setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]") |
3625 |
(setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ") |
3626 |
(setq delimit-columns-separator "\t") |
3627 |
|
3628 |
|
3629 |
Selecting the lines above and typing: |
3630 |
|
3631 |
M-x delimit-columns-region |
3632 |
|
3633 |
It results: |
3634 |
|
3635 |
[ horse , apple , bus , ] |
3636 |
[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ] |
3637 |
[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ] |
3638 |
|
3639 |
delim-col has the following options: |
3640 |
|
3641 |
delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted |
3642 |
before all columns. |
3643 |
|
3644 |
delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted |
3645 |
between each column. |
3646 |
|
3647 |
delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted |
3648 |
after all columns. |
3649 |
|
3650 |
delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates |
3651 |
each column. |
3652 |
|
3653 |
delim-col has the following commands: |
3654 |
|
3655 |
delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region. |
3656 |
delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle. |
3657 |
|
3658 |
*** Recentf mode maintains a menu for visiting files that were |
3659 |
operated on recently. User option recentf-menu-filter specifies a |
3660 |
menu filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the |
3661 |
recent file list can be displayed: |
3662 |
|
3663 |
- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules. |
3664 |
- sorted by file paths, file names, ascending or descending. |
3665 |
- showing paths relative to the current default-directory |
3666 |
|
3667 |
The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to |
3668 |
dynamically change the menu appearance. |
3669 |
|
3670 |
*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header |
3671 |
text. |
3672 |
|
3673 |
*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use |
3674 |
of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't |
3675 |
specific to Message mode. |
3676 |
|
3677 |
*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for |
3678 |
viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files |
3679 |
with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'. |
3680 |
|
3681 |
*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user |
3682 |
interface to access directory servers using different directory |
3683 |
protocols. It has a separate manual. |
3684 |
|
3685 |
*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files |
3686 |
for Autoconf, selected automatically. |
3687 |
|
3688 |
*** windmove.el provides moving between windows. |
3689 |
|
3690 |
*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the |
3691 |
minibuffer with completion. |
3692 |
|
3693 |
*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration |
3694 |
with the diary features. |
3695 |
|
3696 |
*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby |
3697 |
numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting. |
3698 |
|
3699 |
*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto |
3700 |
Fill mode. |
3701 |
|
3702 |
*** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion |
3703 |
facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main |
3704 |
difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning |
3705 |
they can be profiled, debugged, etc. |
3706 |
|
3707 |
*** antlr-mode is a new major mode for editing ANTLR grammar files. |
3708 |
It is automatically turned on for files whose names have the extension |
3709 |
`.g'. |
3710 |
|
3711 |
** Changes in sort.el |
3712 |
|
3713 |
The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0' |
3714 |
as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The |
3715 |
new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default |
3716 |
numeric base. |
3717 |
|
3718 |
** Changes to Ange-ftp |
3719 |
|
3720 |
*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file |
3721 |
names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash |
3722 |
sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.) |
3723 |
|
3724 |
*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive |
3725 |
ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that. |
3726 |
|
3727 |
*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which |
3728 |
output ^M at the end of lines. |
3729 |
|
3730 |
** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor |
3731 |
mode `iswitchb-mode'. |
3732 |
|
3733 |
** Just loading the msb package doesn't switch on Msb mode anymore. |
3734 |
If you have `(require 'msb)' in your .emacs, please replace it with |
3735 |
`(msb-mode 1)'. |
3736 |
|
3737 |
** Flyspell mode has various new options. See the `flyspell' Custom |
3738 |
group. |
3739 |
|
3740 |
** The user option `backward-delete-char-untabify-method' controls the |
3741 |
behavior of `backward-delete-char-untabify'. The following values |
3742 |
are recognized: |
3743 |
|
3744 |
`untabify' -- turn a tab to many spaces, then delete one space; |
3745 |
`hungry' -- delete all whitespace, both tabs and spaces; |
3746 |
`all' -- delete all whitespace, including tabs, spaces and newlines; |
3747 |
nil -- just delete one character. |
3748 |
|
3749 |
Default value is `untabify'. |
3750 |
|
3751 |
[This change was made in Emacs 20.3 but not mentioned then.] |
3752 |
|
3753 |
** In Cperl mode `cperl-invalid-face' should now be a normal face |
3754 |
symbol, not double-quoted. |
3755 |
|
3756 |
** Some packages are declared obsolete, to be removed in a future |
3757 |
version. They are: auto-show, c-mode, hilit19, hscroll, ooutline, |
3758 |
profile, rnews, rnewspost, and sc. Their implementations have been |
3759 |
moved to lisp/obsolete. |
3760 |
|
3761 |
** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el. |
3762 |
To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the |
3763 |
`auto-compression-mode' command. |
3764 |
|
3765 |
** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for |
3766 |
`browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME, and |
3767 |
`browse-url-kde' can be chosen for invoking the KDE browser. |
3768 |
|
3769 |
** The user-option `browse-url-new-window-p' has been renamed to |
3770 |
`browse-url-new-window-flag'. |
3771 |
|
3772 |
** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now |
3773 |
operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode. |
3774 |
|
3775 |
** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It |
3776 |
is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia. |
3777 |
|
3778 |
** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM |
3779 |
support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode, |
3780 |
use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the |
3781 |
buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands |
3782 |
M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a |
3783 |
new command M-x strokes-list-strokes. |
3784 |
|
3785 |
** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts |
3786 |
a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer. |
3787 |
|
3788 |
** Hexl mode allows to insert non-ASCII characters. |
3789 |
|
3790 |
The non-ASCII characters are encoded using the same encoding as the |
3791 |
file you are visiting in Hexl mode. |
3792 |
|
3793 |
** Shell script mode changes. |
3794 |
|
3795 |
Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells |
3796 |
derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizable, and |
3797 |
sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style. |
3798 |
|
3799 |
** Etags changes. |
3800 |
|
3801 |
*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c. |
3802 |
|
3803 |
*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now |
3804 |
possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with |
3805 |
{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out. |
3806 |
This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains |
3807 |
a regular expression. The manual contains details. |
3808 |
|
3809 |
*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function |
3810 |
declarations when given the --declarations option. |
3811 |
|
3812 |
*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form |
3813 |
"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator. |
3814 |
|
3815 |
*** You shouldn't generally need any more the -C or -c++ option: etags |
3816 |
automatically switches to C++ parsing when it meets the `class' or |
3817 |
`template' keywords. |
3818 |
|
3819 |
*** Etags now is able to delve at arbitrary deeps into nested structures in |
3820 |
C-like languages. Previously, it was limited to one or two brace levels. |
3821 |
|
3822 |
*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and |
3823 |
types. |
3824 |
|
3825 |
*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged. |
3826 |
|
3827 |
*** In Java, tags are created for "interface". |
3828 |
|
3829 |
*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs |
3830 |
are now tagged. |
3831 |
|
3832 |
*** In makefiles, tags the targets. |
3833 |
|
3834 |
*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local |
3835 |
variables are tagged. |
3836 |
|
3837 |
*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags. |
3838 |
|
3839 |
*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is |
3840 |
for PSWrap. |
3841 |
|
3842 |
** Changes in etags.el |
3843 |
|
3844 |
*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make |
3845 |
tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default |
3846 |
is to use the same setting as case-fold-search. |
3847 |
|
3848 |
*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting |
3849 |
the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions. |
3850 |
|
3851 |
If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE |
3852 |
FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes |
3853 |
TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist, |
3854 |
obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used. |
3855 |
|
3856 |
TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH. |
3857 |
|
3858 |
FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags |
3859 |
List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol. |
3860 |
|
3861 |
A useful example value for this variable might be something like: |
3862 |
|
3863 |
'(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray) |
3864 |
("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray) |
3865 |
("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray)) |
3866 |
|
3867 |
*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance |
3868 |
of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos. |
3869 |
|
3870 |
*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the |
3871 |
names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer. |
3872 |
|
3873 |
*** You can now search for tags that are part of the filename itself. |
3874 |
If you have tagged the files topfile.c subdir/subfile.c |
3875 |
/tmp/tempfile.c, you can now search for tags "topfile.c", "subfile.c", |
3876 |
"dir/sub", "tempfile", "tempfile.c". If the tag matches the file name, |
3877 |
point will go to the beginning of the file. |
3878 |
|
3879 |
*** Compressed files are now transparently supported if |
3880 |
auto-compression-mode is active. You can tag (with Etags) and search |
3881 |
(with find-tag) both compressed and uncompressed files. |
3882 |
|
3883 |
*** Tags commands like M-x tags-search no longer change point |
3884 |
in buffers where no match is found. In buffers where a match is |
3885 |
found, the original value of point is pushed on the marker ring. |
3886 |
|
3887 |
** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to |
3888 |
remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now |
3889 |
appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings. |
3890 |
|
3891 |
** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'. |
3892 |
|
3893 |
** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file. |
3894 |
|
3895 |
** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps' |
3896 |
containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular |
3897 |
expression from that list, are not checked. |
3898 |
|
3899 |
** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files. |
3900 |
When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file, |
3901 |
and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert |
3902 |
the buffer, just like for the local files. |
3903 |
|
3904 |
** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer. |
3905 |
|
3906 |
** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now |
3907 |
displays local abbrevs, only. |
3908 |
|
3909 |
** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping |
3910 |
paragraphs filled as you modify them. |
3911 |
|
3912 |
** The variable `double-click-fuzz' specifies how much the mouse |
3913 |
may be moved between clicks that are recognized as a pair. Its value |
3914 |
is measured in pixels. |
3915 |
|
3916 |
** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files |
3917 |
to be visited as images. |
3918 |
|
3919 |
** Two new user-options `grep-command' and `grep-find-command' |
3920 |
were added to compile.el. |
3921 |
|
3922 |
** Withdrawn packages |
3923 |
|
3924 |
*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same |
3925 |
functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions. |
3926 |
|
3927 |
*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed. |
3928 |
|
3929 |
*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed. |
3930 |
|
3931 |
|
3932 |
* Incompatible Lisp changes |
3933 |
|
3934 |
There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and |
3935 |
may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference. |
3936 |
See the sections below for details. |
3937 |
|
3938 |
** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom |
3939 |
`(format "%s" foo)' no longer works to copy and remove properties. |
3940 |
Use `copy-sequence' to copy the string, then use `set-text-properties' |
3941 |
to remove the properties of the copy. |
3942 |
|
3943 |
** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code |
3944 |
which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability) |
3945 |
may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from |
3946 |
these properties are active. |
3947 |
|
3948 |
** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search |
3949 |
ranges may affect some code. |
3950 |
|
3951 |
** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook |
3952 |
buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might |
3953 |
make a difference to some code. |
3954 |
|
3955 |
** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which |
3956 |
operates on the minibuffer. |
3957 |
|
3958 |
** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic' |
3959 |
cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce |
3960 |
different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters |
3961 |
(previously, both coding systems would produce the same results). |
3962 |
Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate |
3963 |
character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading |
3964 |
multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE |
3965 |
encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program |
3966 |
reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte |
3967 |
sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as |
3968 |
a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in |
3969 |
the buffer as multibyte characters. |
3970 |
|
3971 |
Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal |
3972 |
MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only |
3973 |
appropriate for reading truly binary files. |
3974 |
|
3975 |
** Code that relies on the obsolete `before-change-function' and |
3976 |
`after-change-function' to detect buffer changes will now fail. Use |
3977 |
`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' instead. |
3978 |
|
3979 |
** Code that uses `concat' with integer args now gets an error, as |
3980 |
long promised. So does any code that uses derivatives of `concat', |
3981 |
such as `mapconcat'. |
3982 |
|
3983 |
** The function base64-decode-string now always returns a unibyte |
3984 |
string. |
3985 |
|
3986 |
** Not a Lisp incompatibility as such but, with the introduction of |
3987 |
extra private charsets, there is now only one slot free for a new |
3988 |
dimension-2 private charset. User code which tries to add more than |
3989 |
one extra will fail unless you rebuild Emacs with some standard |
3990 |
charset(s) removed; that is probably inadvisable because it changes |
3991 |
the emacs-mule encoding. Also, files stored in the emacs-mule |
3992 |
encoding using Emacs 20 with additional private charsets defined will |
3993 |
probably not be read correctly by Emacs 21. |
3994 |
|
3995 |
** The variable `directory-sep-char' is slated for removal. |
3996 |
Not really a change (yet), but a projected one that you should be |
3997 |
aware of: The variable `directory-sep-char' is deprecated, and should |
3998 |
not be used. It was always ignored on GNU/Linux and Unix systems and |
3999 |
on MS-DOS, but the MS-Windows port tried to support it by adapting the |
4000 |
behavior of certain primitives to the value of this variable. It |
4001 |
turned out that such support cannot be reliable, so it was decided to |
4002 |
remove this variable in the near future. Lisp programs are well |
4003 |
advised not to set it to anything but '/', because any different value |
4004 |
will not have any effect when support for this variable is removed. |
4005 |
|
4006 |
|
4007 |
* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual, |
4008 |
(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.) |
4009 |
|
4010 |
** Function assq-delete-all replaces function assoc-delete-all. |
4011 |
|
4012 |
** The new function animate-string, from lisp/play/animate.el |
4013 |
allows the animated display of strings. |
4014 |
|
4015 |
** The new function `interactive-form' can be used to obtain the |
4016 |
interactive form of a function. |
4017 |
|
4018 |
** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies |
4019 |
between custom options. Example: |
4020 |
|
4021 |
(defcustom default-input-method nil |
4022 |
"*Default input method for multilingual text (a string). |
4023 |
This is the input method activated automatically by the command |
4024 |
`toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])." |
4025 |
:group 'mule |
4026 |
:type '(choice (const nil) string) |
4027 |
:set-after '(current-language-environment)) |
4028 |
|
4029 |
This specifies that default-input-method should be set after |
4030 |
current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears |
4031 |
first in a custom-set-variables statement. |
4032 |
|
4033 |
** The new hook `kbd-macro-termination-hook' is run at the end of |
4034 |
function execute-kbd-macro. Functions on this hook are called with no |
4035 |
args. The hook is run independent of how the macro was terminated |
4036 |
(signal or normal termination). |
4037 |
|
4038 |
** Functions `butlast' and `nbutlast' for removing trailing elements |
4039 |
from a list are now available without requiring the CL package. |
4040 |
|
4041 |
** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil |
4042 |
to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights. |
4043 |
|
4044 |
** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies |
4045 |
alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font. |
4046 |
|
4047 |
** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum". |
4048 |
|
4049 |
** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually |
4050 |
deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame |
4051 |
being deleted. |
4052 |
|
4053 |
** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg. |
4054 |
|
4055 |
** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed. |
4056 |
If a range in a regular expression or the arg of |
4057 |
skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends |
4058 |
with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is |
4059 |
C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's |
4060 |
charset. |
4061 |
|
4062 |
** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in |
4063 |
the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the |
4064 |
message. |
4065 |
|
4066 |
** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an |
4067 |
expression with auto-compression-mode enabled. |
4068 |
|
4069 |
** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced |
4070 |
with the more general `:mask' property. |
4071 |
|
4072 |
** Image specifications accept more `:conversion's. |
4073 |
|
4074 |
** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a |
4075 |
backslash. |
4076 |
|
4077 |
** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs |
4078 |
is running in batch mode. For example, |
4079 |
|
4080 |
(message "%s" (read t)) |
4081 |
|
4082 |
will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result |
4083 |
to standard output. |
4084 |
|
4085 |
** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list', |
4086 |
`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional. |
4087 |
|
4088 |
** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer' |
4089 |
will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new |
4090 |
frame or window. |
4091 |
|
4092 |
** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences |
4093 |
were added |
4094 |
|
4095 |
- Function: remove ELT SEQ |
4096 |
|
4097 |
Return a copy of SEQ with all occurrences of ELT removed. SEQ must be |
4098 |
a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'. |
4099 |
|
4100 |
- Function: remq ELT LIST |
4101 |
|
4102 |
Return a copy of LIST with all occurrences of ELT removed. The |
4103 |
comparison is done with `eq'. |
4104 |
|
4105 |
** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings. |
4106 |
|
4107 |
** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table |
4108 |
has been changed: WEAK can now have new values `key-or-value' and |
4109 |
`key-and-value', in addition the `nil', `key', `value', and `t'. |
4110 |
|
4111 |
** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string |
4112 |
without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may |
4113 |
convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary. |
4114 |
|
4115 |
** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function |
4116 |
or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string. |
4117 |
|
4118 |
** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the |
4119 |
function was declared obsolete. |
4120 |
|
4121 |
** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is |
4122 |
retained as an alias). |
4123 |
|
4124 |
** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs. |
4125 |
It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result |
4126 |
is automatically converted to Emacs' form. |
4127 |
|
4128 |
** The new function `window-list' has been defined |
4129 |
|
4130 |
- Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF |
4131 |
|
4132 |
Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or |
4133 |
omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use |
4134 |
the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window, |
4135 |
even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the |
4136 |
minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t |
4137 |
means never include the minibuffer window. |
4138 |
|
4139 |
** There's a new function `get-window-with-predicate' defined as follows |
4140 |
|
4141 |
- Function: get-window-with-predicate PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT |
4142 |
|
4143 |
Return a window satisfying PREDICATE. |
4144 |
|
4145 |
This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows', |
4146 |
calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as |
4147 |
argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil |
4148 |
value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is |
4149 |
returned. |
4150 |
|
4151 |
Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even |
4152 |
if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff |
4153 |
it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the |
4154 |
minibuffer even if it is active. |
4155 |
|
4156 |
Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer |
4157 |
counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count |
4158 |
too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame |
4159 |
and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts, |
4160 |
`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you |
4161 |
entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window. |
4162 |
|
4163 |
ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument. |
4164 |
ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above. |
4165 |
ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames. |
4166 |
ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames. |
4167 |
ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames. |
4168 |
If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame. |
4169 |
Anything else means restrict to the selected frame. |
4170 |
|
4171 |
** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and |
4172 |
event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional |
4173 |
argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed. |
4174 |
|
4175 |
** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a |
4176 |
call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that |
4177 |
message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x. |
4178 |
Default value is nil. |
4179 |
|
4180 |
** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil, |
4181 |
meaning no limit. |
4182 |
|
4183 |
** The new user option `line-number-display-limit-width' controls |
4184 |
the maximum width of lines in a buffer for which Emacs displays line |
4185 |
numbers in the mode line. The default is 200. |
4186 |
|
4187 |
** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred |
4188 |
coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and |
4189 |
DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified, |
4190 |
|
4191 |
** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument |
4192 |
list of a primitive. |
4193 |
|
4194 |
** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps. |
4195 |
|
4196 |
** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the |
4197 |
buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property. |
4198 |
This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather |
4199 |
than replacing the local map. |
4200 |
|
4201 |
** The obsolete variables `before-change-function' and |
4202 |
`after-change-function' are no longer acted upon and have been |
4203 |
removed. Use `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' |
4204 |
instead. |
4205 |
|
4206 |
** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'. |
4207 |
|
4208 |
** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, |
4209 |
as promised long ago. |
4210 |
|
4211 |
** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float. |
4212 |
|
4213 |
** The new variable auto-coding-regexp-alist specifies coding systems |
4214 |
for reading specific files, analogous to auto-coding-alist, but |
4215 |
patterns are checked against file contents instead of file names. |
4216 |
|
4217 |
|
4218 |
* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features) |
4219 |
|
4220 |
** The new package rx.el provides an alternative sexp notation for |
4221 |
regular expressions. |
4222 |
|
4223 |
- Function: rx-to-string SEXP |
4224 |
|
4225 |
Translate SEXP into a regular expression in string notation. |
4226 |
|
4227 |
- Macro: rx SEXP |
4228 |
|
4229 |
Translate SEXP into a regular expression in string notation. |
4230 |
|
4231 |
The following are valid subforms of regular expressions in sexp |
4232 |
notation. |
4233 |
|
4234 |
STRING |
4235 |
matches string STRING literally. |
4236 |
|
4237 |
CHAR |
4238 |
matches character CHAR literally. |
4239 |
|
4240 |
`not-newline' |
4241 |
matches any character except a newline. |
4242 |
. |
4243 |
`anything' |
4244 |
matches any character |
4245 |
|
4246 |
`(any SET)' |
4247 |
matches any character in SET. SET may be a character or string. |
4248 |
Ranges of characters can be specified as `A-Z' in strings. |
4249 |
|
4250 |
'(in SET)' |
4251 |
like `any'. |
4252 |
|
4253 |
`(not (any SET))' |
4254 |
matches any character not in SET |
4255 |
|
4256 |
`line-start' |
4257 |
matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of a line |
4258 |
in the text being matched |
4259 |
|
4260 |
`line-end' |
4261 |
is similar to `line-start' but matches only at the end of a line |
4262 |
|
4263 |
`string-start' |
4264 |
matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the |
4265 |
string being matched against. |
4266 |
|
4267 |
`string-end' |
4268 |
matches the empty string, but only at the end of the |
4269 |
string being matched against. |
4270 |
|
4271 |
`buffer-start' |
4272 |
matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the |
4273 |
buffer being matched against. |
4274 |
|
4275 |
`buffer-end' |
4276 |
matches the empty string, but only at the end of the |
4277 |
buffer being matched against. |
4278 |
|
4279 |
`point' |
4280 |
matches the empty string, but only at point. |
4281 |
|
4282 |
`word-start' |
4283 |
matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a |
4284 |
word. |
4285 |
|
4286 |
`word-end' |
4287 |
matches the empty string, but only at the end of a word. |
4288 |
|
4289 |
`word-boundary' |
4290 |
matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a |
4291 |
word. |
4292 |
|
4293 |
`(not word-boundary)' |
4294 |
matches the empty string, but not at the beginning or end of a |
4295 |
word. |
4296 |
|
4297 |
`digit' |
4298 |
matches 0 through 9. |
4299 |
|
4300 |
`control' |
4301 |
matches ASCII control characters. |
4302 |
|
4303 |
`hex-digit' |
4304 |
matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F. |
4305 |
|
4306 |
`blank' |
4307 |
matches space and tab only. |
4308 |
|
4309 |
`graphic' |
4310 |
matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars, |
4311 |
space, and DEL. |
4312 |
|
4313 |
`printing' |
4314 |
matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars |
4315 |
and DEL. |
4316 |
|
4317 |
`alphanumeric' |
4318 |
matches letters and digits. (But at present, for multibyte characters, |
4319 |
it matches anything that has word syntax.) |
4320 |
|
4321 |
`letter' |
4322 |
matches letters. (But at present, for multibyte characters, |
4323 |
it matches anything that has word syntax.) |
4324 |
|
4325 |
`ascii' |
4326 |
matches ASCII (unibyte) characters. |
4327 |
|
4328 |
`nonascii' |
4329 |
matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters. |
4330 |
|
4331 |
`lower' |
4332 |
matches anything lower-case. |
4333 |
|
4334 |
`upper' |
4335 |
matches anything upper-case. |
4336 |
|
4337 |
`punctuation' |
4338 |
matches punctuation. (But at present, for multibyte characters, |
4339 |
it matches anything that has non-word syntax.) |
4340 |
|
4341 |
`space' |
4342 |
matches anything that has whitespace syntax. |
4343 |
|
4344 |
`word' |
4345 |
matches anything that has word syntax. |
4346 |
|
4347 |
`(syntax SYNTAX)' |
4348 |
matches a character with syntax SYNTAX. SYNTAX must be one |
4349 |
of the following symbols. |
4350 |
|
4351 |
`whitespace' (\\s- in string notation) |
4352 |
`punctuation' (\\s.) |
4353 |
`word' (\\sw) |
4354 |
`symbol' (\\s_) |
4355 |
`open-parenthesis' (\\s() |
4356 |
`close-parenthesis' (\\s)) |
4357 |
`expression-prefix' (\\s') |
4358 |
`string-quote' (\\s\") |
4359 |
`paired-delimiter' (\\s$) |
4360 |
`escape' (\\s\\) |
4361 |
`character-quote' (\\s/) |
4362 |
`comment-start' (\\s<) |
4363 |
`comment-end' (\\s>) |
4364 |
|
4365 |
`(not (syntax SYNTAX))' |
4366 |
matches a character that has not syntax SYNTAX. |
4367 |
|
4368 |
`(category CATEGORY)' |
4369 |
matches a character with category CATEGORY. CATEGORY must be |
4370 |
either a character to use for C, or one of the following symbols. |
4371 |
|
4372 |
`consonant' (\\c0 in string notation) |
4373 |
`base-vowel' (\\c1) |
4374 |
`upper-diacritical-mark' (\\c2) |
4375 |
`lower-diacritical-mark' (\\c3) |
4376 |
`tone-mark' (\\c4) |
4377 |
`symbol' (\\c5) |
4378 |
`digit' (\\c6) |
4379 |
`vowel-modifying-diacritical-mark' (\\c7) |
4380 |
`vowel-sign' (\\c8) |
4381 |
`semivowel-lower' (\\c9) |
4382 |
`not-at-end-of-line' (\\c<) |
4383 |
`not-at-beginning-of-line' (\\c>) |
4384 |
`alpha-numeric-two-byte' (\\cA) |
4385 |
`chinse-two-byte' (\\cC) |
4386 |
`greek-two-byte' (\\cG) |
4387 |
`japanese-hiragana-two-byte' (\\cH) |
4388 |
`indian-tow-byte' (\\cI) |
4389 |
`japanese-katakana-two-byte' (\\cK) |
4390 |
`korean-hangul-two-byte' (\\cN) |
4391 |
`cyrillic-two-byte' (\\cY) |
4392 |
`ascii' (\\ca) |
4393 |
`arabic' (\\cb) |
4394 |
`chinese' (\\cc) |
4395 |
`ethiopic' (\\ce) |
4396 |
`greek' (\\cg) |
4397 |
`korean' (\\ch) |
4398 |
`indian' (\\ci) |
4399 |
`japanese' (\\cj) |
4400 |
`japanese-katakana' (\\ck) |
4401 |
`latin' (\\cl) |
4402 |
`lao' (\\co) |
4403 |
`tibetan' (\\cq) |
4404 |
`japanese-roman' (\\cr) |
4405 |
`thai' (\\ct) |
4406 |
`vietnamese' (\\cv) |
4407 |
`hebrew' (\\cw) |
4408 |
`cyrillic' (\\cy) |
4409 |
`can-break' (\\c|) |
4410 |
|
4411 |
`(not (category CATEGORY))' |
4412 |
matches a character that has not category CATEGORY. |
4413 |
|
4414 |
`(and SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)' |
4415 |
matches what SEXP1 matches, followed by what SEXP2 matches, etc. |
4416 |
|
4417 |
`(submatch SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)' |
4418 |
like `and', but makes the match accessible with `match-end', |
4419 |
`match-beginning', and `match-string'. |
4420 |
|
4421 |
`(group SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)' |
4422 |
another name for `submatch'. |
4423 |
|
4424 |
`(or SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)' |
4425 |
matches anything that matches SEXP1 or SEXP2, etc. If all |
4426 |
args are strings, use `regexp-opt' to optimize the resulting |
4427 |
regular expression. |
4428 |
|
4429 |
`(minimal-match SEXP)' |
4430 |
produce a non-greedy regexp for SEXP. Normally, regexps matching |
4431 |
zero or more occurrences of something are \"greedy\" in that they |
4432 |
match as much as they can, as long as the overall regexp can |
4433 |
still match. A non-greedy regexp matches as little as possible. |
4434 |
|
4435 |
`(maximal-match SEXP)' |
4436 |
produce a greedy regexp for SEXP. This is the default. |
4437 |
|
4438 |
`(zero-or-more SEXP)' |
4439 |
matches zero or more occurrences of what SEXP matches. |
4440 |
|
4441 |
`(0+ SEXP)' |
4442 |
like `zero-or-more'. |
4443 |
|
4444 |
`(* SEXP)' |
4445 |
like `zero-or-more', but always produces a greedy regexp. |
4446 |
|
4447 |
`(*? SEXP)' |
4448 |
like `zero-or-more', but always produces a non-greedy regexp. |
4449 |
|
4450 |
`(one-or-more SEXP)' |
4451 |
matches one or more occurrences of A. |
4452 |
|
4453 |
`(1+ SEXP)' |
4454 |
like `one-or-more'. |
4455 |
|
4456 |
`(+ SEXP)' |
4457 |
like `one-or-more', but always produces a greedy regexp. |
4458 |
|
4459 |
`(+? SEXP)' |
4460 |
like `one-or-more', but always produces a non-greedy regexp. |
4461 |
|
4462 |
`(zero-or-one SEXP)' |
4463 |
matches zero or one occurrences of A. |
4464 |
|
4465 |
`(optional SEXP)' |
4466 |
like `zero-or-one'. |
4467 |
|
4468 |
`(? SEXP)' |
4469 |
like `zero-or-one', but always produces a greedy regexp. |
4470 |
|
4471 |
`(?? SEXP)' |
4472 |
like `zero-or-one', but always produces a non-greedy regexp. |
4473 |
|
4474 |
`(repeat N SEXP)' |
4475 |
matches N occurrences of what SEXP matches. |
4476 |
|
4477 |
`(repeat N M SEXP)' |
4478 |
matches N to M occurrences of what SEXP matches. |
4479 |
|
4480 |
`(eval FORM)' |
4481 |
evaluate FORM and insert result. If result is a string, |
4482 |
`regexp-quote' it. |
4483 |
|
4484 |
`(regexp REGEXP)' |
4485 |
include REGEXP in string notation in the result. |
4486 |
|
4487 |
*** The features `md5' and `overlay' are now provided by default. |
4488 |
|
4489 |
*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the |
4490 |
buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside |
4491 |
the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved |
4492 |
restriction to be restored incorrectly. |
4493 |
|
4494 |
*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include |
4495 |
`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list |
4496 |
when they find 8-bit characters. Previously, they included `ascii' in a |
4497 |
multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer. |
4498 |
|
4499 |
*** The functions `set-buffer-multibyte', `string-as-multibyte' and |
4500 |
`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer or a string |
4501 |
if it contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set. |
4502 |
|
4503 |
*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is |
4504 |
changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern |
4505 |
[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character |
4506 |
regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if |
4507 |
the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the |
4508 |
extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra |
4509 |
bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset |
4510 |
eight-bit-graphic. |
4511 |
|
4512 |
** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables. |
4513 |
|
4514 |
A fontset can now be specified for each independent character, for |
4515 |
a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a |
4516 |
character set as previously. |
4517 |
|
4518 |
*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed. |
4519 |
They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function |
4520 |
modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER. |
4521 |
|
4522 |
CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic |
4523 |
characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the |
4524 |
range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that |
4525 |
case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset. |
4526 |
|
4527 |
FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family |
4528 |
name of a font and REGISTRY is a registry name of a font. |
4529 |
|
4530 |
*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset |
4531 |
registries of character sets are set in the default fontset |
4532 |
"fontset-default". |
4533 |
|
4534 |
*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second |
4535 |
argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets. |
4536 |
|
4537 |
** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character |
4538 |
composition is done by a special text property `composition' in |
4539 |
buffers and strings. |
4540 |
|
4541 |
*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite |
4542 |
character' which is an independent character with a unique character |
4543 |
code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters' |
4544 |
have been deleted: composite-char-component, |
4545 |
composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule, |
4546 |
composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete. |
4547 |
The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have |
4548 |
also been deleted. |
4549 |
|
4550 |
*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to |
4551 |
specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable |
4552 |
`reference-point-alist' for more detail. |
4553 |
|
4554 |
*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and |
4555 |
MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a |
4556 |
composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters |
4557 |
may differ between buffer and string text. |
4558 |
|
4559 |
*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END, |
4560 |
COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC. |
4561 |
|
4562 |
*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition' |
4563 |
directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string. |
4564 |
Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property |
4565 |
`composition' from STRING. |
4566 |
|
4567 |
*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about |
4568 |
a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string. |
4569 |
|
4570 |
*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as |
4571 |
obsolete. |
4572 |
|
4573 |
** The new coding system `mac-roman' is primarily intended for use on |
4574 |
the Macintosh but may be used generally for Macintosh-encoded text. |
4575 |
|
4576 |
** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff', |
4577 |
`mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' have been |
4578 |
introduced for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF, |
4579 |
U+2500..U+33FF, U+E000..U+FFFF respectively. |
4580 |
|
4581 |
Note that the character sets are not yet unified in Emacs, so |
4582 |
characters which belong to charsets such as Latin-2, Greek, Hebrew, |
4583 |
etc. and the same characters in the `mule-unicode-*' charsets are |
4584 |
different characters, as far as Emacs is concerned. For example, text |
4585 |
which includes Unicode characters from the Latin-2 locale cannot be |
4586 |
encoded by Emacs with ISO 8859-2 coding system. |
4587 |
|
4588 |
** The new coding system `mule-utf-8' has been added. |
4589 |
It provides limited support for decoding/encoding UTF-8 text. For |
4590 |
details, please see the documentation string of this coding system. |
4591 |
|
4592 |
** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and |
4593 |
`japanese-jisx0213-2' have been introduced for the new Japanese |
4594 |
standard JIS X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2. |
4595 |
|
4596 |
** The new character sets `latin-iso8859-14' and `latin-iso8859-15' |
4597 |
have been introduced. |
4598 |
|
4599 |
** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic' |
4600 |
have been introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and |
4601 |
0xA0..0xFF respectively. Note that the multibyte representation of |
4602 |
eight-bit-control is never exposed; this leads to an exception in the |
4603 |
emacs-mule coding system, which encodes everything else to the |
4604 |
buffer/string internal representation. Note that to search for |
4605 |
eight-bit-graphic characters in a multibyte buffer, the search string |
4606 |
must be multibyte, otherwise such characters will be converted to |
4607 |
their multibyte equivalent. |
4608 |
|
4609 |
** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to |
4610 |
that offset in the file before writing. |
4611 |
|
4612 |
** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and |
4613 |
compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode). |
4614 |
|
4615 |
** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the |
4616 |
`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer |
4617 |
from which the command was issued. |
4618 |
|
4619 |
** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp', |
4620 |
`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp', |
4621 |
`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two |
4622 |
additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to |
4623 |
operate on. |
4624 |
|
4625 |
** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative |
4626 |
to `window-buffer-height'. |
4627 |
|
4628 |
- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW |
4629 |
|
4630 |
Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END. |
4631 |
The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual |
4632 |
lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc. |
4633 |
|
4634 |
Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max' |
4635 |
respectively. |
4636 |
|
4637 |
If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optional third argument |
4638 |
COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil. |
4639 |
|
4640 |
The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for |
4641 |
obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so |
4642 |
on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters. |
4643 |
|
4644 |
Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current |
4645 |
buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes |
4646 |
possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it |
4647 |
is currently displayed in some window. |
4648 |
|
4649 |
** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the |
4650 |
argument function's results. |
4651 |
|
4652 |
** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now |
4653 |
signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails. Also, |
4654 |
`base64-decode-string' now always returns a unibyte string (in Emacs |
4655 |
20, it returned a multibyte string when the result was a valid multibyte |
4656 |
sequence). |
4657 |
|
4658 |
** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body' |
4659 |
header in the list of headers passed to it. |
4660 |
|
4661 |
** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but |
4662 |
ignores differences in case and text representation. |
4663 |
|
4664 |
** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the |
4665 |
cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted |
4666 |
as follows: |
4667 |
|
4668 |
t use the cursor specified for the frame (default) |
4669 |
nil don't display a cursor |
4670 |
`bar' display a bar cursor with default width |
4671 |
(bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH |
4672 |
others display a box cursor. |
4673 |
|
4674 |
** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether |
4675 |
an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a |
4676 |
defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not |
4677 |
set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning. |
4678 |
|
4679 |
** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax |
4680 |
specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to |
4681 |
the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table' |
4682 |
text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'. |
4683 |
|
4684 |
Example: |
4685 |
|
4686 |
(string-to-syntax "()") |
4687 |
=> (4 . 41) |
4688 |
|
4689 |
** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases |
4690 |
other than 10. |
4691 |
|
4692 |
*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2). |
4693 |
INTEGER optionally contains a sign. |
4694 |
|
4695 |
#b1111 |
4696 |
=> 15 |
4697 |
#b-1111 |
4698 |
=> -15 |
4699 |
|
4700 |
*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8). |
4701 |
|
4702 |
#o666 |
4703 |
=> 438 |
4704 |
|
4705 |
*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16). |
4706 |
|
4707 |
#xbeef |
4708 |
=> 48815 |
4709 |
|
4710 |
*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36. |
4711 |
|
4712 |
#2R-111 |
4713 |
=> -7 |
4714 |
#25rah |
4715 |
=> 267 |
4716 |
|
4717 |
** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of |
4718 |
the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC |
4719 |
and isn't a string. |
4720 |
|
4721 |
** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for |
4722 |
a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil |
4723 |
value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is |
4724 |
not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string. |
4725 |
|
4726 |
** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience. |
4727 |
|
4728 |
** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches |
4729 |
for a regexp in a string. |
4730 |
|
4731 |
** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook |
4732 |
`mouse-position-function'. |
4733 |
|
4734 |
** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers |
4735 |
that don't fit into a Lisp integer. |
4736 |
|
4737 |
** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed. |
4738 |
Keywords are now always considered constants. |
4739 |
|
4740 |
** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and |
4741 |
returns it. |
4742 |
|
4743 |
** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector |
4744 |
returned by function `recent-keys'. |
4745 |
|
4746 |
** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function' |
4747 |
can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns. |
4748 |
Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding C-M-a |
4749 |
etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the |
4750 |
mode. |
4751 |
|
4752 |
** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument |
4753 |
and is renamed `define-minor-mode'. |
4754 |
|
4755 |
** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol |
4756 |
has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook |
4757 |
function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it |
4758 |
returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has |
4759 |
been performed." |
4760 |
|
4761 |
When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character, |
4762 |
and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the |
4763 |
hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done, |
4764 |
then the self-inserting character is not inserted. |
4765 |
|
4766 |
** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument. |
4767 |
In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray, |
4768 |
and the function's value is nil if it is not found. |
4769 |
|
4770 |
** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms |
4771 |
with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a |
4772 |
specified table. |
4773 |
|
4774 |
(with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY) |
4775 |
|
4776 |
Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of |
4777 |
TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the |
4778 |
saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is |
4779 |
what BODY returns. |
4780 |
|
4781 |
** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as |
4782 |
Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators. |
4783 |
Also back-references like \2 are now considered as an error if the |
4784 |
corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet). |
4785 |
Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\'). |
4786 |
|
4787 |
** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been |
4788 |
removed since it wasn't used by anything. |
4789 |
|
4790 |
** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required |
4791 |
instead of being optional. |
4792 |
|
4793 |
** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to |
4794 |
modify read-only text. |
4795 |
|
4796 |
** New functions and variables for locales. |
4797 |
|
4798 |
The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and |
4799 |
decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and |
4800 |
time functions like strftime. The new variables |
4801 |
`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system |
4802 |
locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions. |
4803 |
|
4804 |
The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language |
4805 |
environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from |
4806 |
the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG |
4807 |
environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need |
4808 |
not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables |
4809 |
`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and |
4810 |
`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions. |
4811 |
|
4812 |
** syntax tables now understand nested comments. |
4813 |
To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n' |
4814 |
modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment |
4815 |
start sequences. |
4816 |
|
4817 |
** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p' |
4818 |
because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology. |
4819 |
|
4820 |
** New function `propertize' |
4821 |
|
4822 |
The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct |
4823 |
strings with text properties. |
4824 |
|
4825 |
- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES |
4826 |
|
4827 |
Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified |
4828 |
by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with |
4829 |
PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the |
4830 |
specified value of that property. Example: |
4831 |
|
4832 |
(propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t) |
4833 |
|
4834 |
** push and pop macros. |
4835 |
|
4836 |
Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp |
4837 |
are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols |
4838 |
as the place that holds the list to be changed. |
4839 |
|
4840 |
(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value. |
4841 |
(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it |
4842 |
(thus altering the value of LISTNAME). |
4843 |
|
4844 |
** New dolist and dotimes macros. |
4845 |
|
4846 |
Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp |
4847 |
are now defined in Emacs Lisp. |
4848 |
|
4849 |
(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...) |
4850 |
Execute body once for each element of LIST, |
4851 |
using the variable VAR to hold the current element. |
4852 |
Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted. |
4853 |
|
4854 |
(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...) |
4855 |
Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0, |
4856 |
inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive. |
4857 |
Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted. |
4858 |
|
4859 |
** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such as |
4860 |
[:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. These must be used within a character |
4861 |
class--for instance, [-[:digit:].+] matches digits or a period |
4862 |
or a sign. |
4863 |
|
4864 |
[:digit:] matches 0 through 9 |
4865 |
[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters |
4866 |
[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F. |
4867 |
[:blank:] matches space and tab only |
4868 |
[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars, |
4869 |
space, and DEL. |
4870 |
[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars |
4871 |
and DEL. |
4872 |
[:alnum:] matches letters and digits. |
4873 |
(But at present, for multibyte characters, |
4874 |
it matches anything that has word syntax.) |
4875 |
[:alpha:] matches letters. |
4876 |
(But at present, for multibyte characters, |
4877 |
it matches anything that has word syntax.) |
4878 |
[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters. |
4879 |
[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters. |
4880 |
[:lower:] matches anything lower-case. |
4881 |
[:punct:] matches punctuation. |
4882 |
(But at present, for multibyte characters, |
4883 |
it matches anything that has non-word syntax.) |
4884 |
[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax. |
4885 |
[:upper:] matches anything upper-case. |
4886 |
[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax. |
4887 |
|
4888 |
** Emacs now has built-in hash tables. |
4889 |
|
4890 |
The following functions are defined for hash tables: |
4891 |
|
4892 |
- Function: make-hash-table ARGS |
4893 |
|
4894 |
The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments |
4895 |
are optional. The following arguments are defined: |
4896 |
|
4897 |
:test TEST |
4898 |
|
4899 |
TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'. |
4900 |
Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined, |
4901 |
it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'. |
4902 |
|
4903 |
:size SIZE |
4904 |
|
4905 |
SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how |
4906 |
many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65. |
4907 |
|
4908 |
:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE |
4909 |
|
4910 |
REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes |
4911 |
full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old |
4912 |
size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float > |
4913 |
1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the |
4914 |
old size. Default rehash size is 1.5. |
4915 |
|
4916 |
:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD |
4917 |
|
4918 |
THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the |
4919 |
hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) / |
4920 |
(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8. |
4921 |
|
4922 |
:weakness WEAK |
4923 |
|
4924 |
WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', |
4925 |
`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as |
4926 |
`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage |
4927 |
collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere |
4928 |
outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables. |
4929 |
|
4930 |
- Function: makehash &optional TEST |
4931 |
|
4932 |
Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified. |
4933 |
|
4934 |
- Function: hash-table-p TABLE |
4935 |
|
4936 |
Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object. |
4937 |
|
4938 |
- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE |
4939 |
|
4940 |
Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and |
4941 |
values are shared. |
4942 |
|
4943 |
- Function: hash-table-count TABLE |
4944 |
|
4945 |
Returns the number of entries in TABLE. |
4946 |
|
4947 |
- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE |
4948 |
|
4949 |
Returns the rehash size of TABLE. |
4950 |
|
4951 |
- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE |
4952 |
|
4953 |
Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE. |
4954 |
|
4955 |
- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE |
4956 |
|
4957 |
Returns the size of TABLE. |
4958 |
|
4959 |
- Function: hash-table-test TABLE |
4960 |
|
4961 |
Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys. |
4962 |
|
4963 |
- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE |
4964 |
|
4965 |
Returns the weakness specified for TABLE. |
4966 |
|
4967 |
- Function: clrhash TABLE |
4968 |
|
4969 |
Clear TABLE. |
4970 |
|
4971 |
- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT |
4972 |
|
4973 |
Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if |
4974 |
not found. |
4975 |
|
4976 |
- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE |
4977 |
|
4978 |
Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with |
4979 |
another value, replace the old value with VALUE. |
4980 |
|
4981 |
- Function: remhash KEY TABLE |
4982 |
|
4983 |
Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there. |
4984 |
|
4985 |
- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE |
4986 |
|
4987 |
Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two |
4988 |
arguments KEY and VALUE. |
4989 |
|
4990 |
- Function: sxhash OBJ |
4991 |
|
4992 |
Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ. |
4993 |
|
4994 |
- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN |
4995 |
|
4996 |
Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as |
4997 |
a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for |
4998 |
comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test |
4999 |
and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test' |
5000 |
of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN). |
5001 |
|
5002 |
TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same. |
5003 |
|
5004 |
HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash |
5005 |
code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of |
5006 |
integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers. |
5007 |
|
5008 |
Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to |
5009 |
be strings that are compared case-insensitively. |
5010 |
|
5011 |
(defun case-fold-string= (a b) |
5012 |
(compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t)) |
5013 |
|
5014 |
(defun case-fold-string-hash (a) |
5015 |
(sxhash (upcase a))) |
5016 |
|
5017 |
(define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string= |
5018 |
'case-fold-string-hash)) |
5019 |
|
5020 |
(make-hash-table :test 'case-fold) |
5021 |
|
5022 |
** The Lisp reader handles circular structure. |
5023 |
|
5024 |
It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent |
5025 |
circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents |
5026 |
a cons cell which is its own cdr. |
5027 |
|
5028 |
** The Lisp printer handles circular structure. |
5029 |
|
5030 |
If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs |
5031 |
#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure. |
5032 |
|
5033 |
** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or |
5034 |
t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the |
5035 |
specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it |
5036 |
is too short to reach that column. |
5037 |
|
5038 |
** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may |
5039 |
now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION |
5040 |
after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with |
5041 |
two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made. |
5042 |
|
5043 |
If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters, |
5044 |
perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily |
5045 |
and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it. |
5046 |
|
5047 |
** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument |
5048 |
to specify which buffer to return the size of. |
5049 |
|
5050 |
** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook |
5051 |
calendar-move-hook after moving point. |
5052 |
|
5053 |
** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a |
5054 |
directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be |
5055 |
small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If |
5056 |
small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use |
5057 |
temporary-file-directory instead. |
5058 |
|
5059 |
** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all |
5060 |
the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects |
5061 |
`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as |
5062 |
hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties. |
5063 |
|
5064 |
** assq-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the |
5065 |
elements of an alist which have a car `eq' to a particular value. |
5066 |
|
5067 |
** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file. |
5068 |
|
5069 |
make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually |
5070 |
creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error, |
5071 |
ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file. |
5072 |
|
5073 |
** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region' |
5074 |
|
5075 |
The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists |
5076 |
on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW |
5077 |
is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists; |
5078 |
never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means |
5079 |
ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and |
5080 |
overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation. |
5081 |
|
5082 |
If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl', |
5083 |
that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call |
5084 |
to get an error if the file exists at that time. |
5085 |
The error reported is `file-already-exists'. |
5086 |
|
5087 |
** Function `format' now handles text properties. |
5088 |
|
5089 |
Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string. |
5090 |
If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties |
5091 |
ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the |
5092 |
result string. |
5093 |
|
5094 |
Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result |
5095 |
string where arguments appear in the result string. |
5096 |
|
5097 |
Example: |
5098 |
|
5099 |
(let ((s1 "hello, %s") |
5100 |
(s2 "world")) |
5101 |
(put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1) |
5102 |
(put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2) |
5103 |
(format s1 s2)) |
5104 |
|
5105 |
results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end. |
5106 |
|
5107 |
** Messages can now be displayed with text properties. |
5108 |
|
5109 |
Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'. |
5110 |
The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic |
5111 |
argument in it. |
5112 |
|
5113 |
(let ((msg "hello, %s!") |
5114 |
(arg "world")) |
5115 |
(put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg) |
5116 |
(put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg) |
5117 |
(message msg arg)) |
5118 |
|
5119 |
** Sound support |
5120 |
|
5121 |
Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs |
5122 |
(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver). |
5123 |
|
5124 |
Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio |
5125 |
(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' |
5126 |
to enable sound support. |
5127 |
|
5128 |
Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a |
5129 |
list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined |
5130 |
when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The |
5131 |
functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the |
5132 |
sound to play, before playing the sound. |
5133 |
|
5134 |
The following sound properties are supported: |
5135 |
|
5136 |
- `:file FILE' |
5137 |
|
5138 |
FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be |
5139 |
searched relative to `data-directory'. |
5140 |
|
5141 |
- `:data DATA' |
5142 |
|
5143 |
DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data |
5144 |
may be present, but not both. |
5145 |
|
5146 |
- `:volume VOLUME' |
5147 |
|
5148 |
VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range |
5149 |
0..1. This property is optional. |
5150 |
|
5151 |
- `:device DEVICE' |
5152 |
|
5153 |
DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the |
5154 |
sound. The default device is system-dependent. |
5155 |
|
5156 |
Other properties are ignored. |
5157 |
|
5158 |
An alternative interface is called as |
5159 |
(play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE). |
5160 |
|
5161 |
** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group. |
5162 |
|
5163 |
** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being |
5164 |
a keyword symbol. |
5165 |
|
5166 |
** Changes to garbage collection |
5167 |
|
5168 |
*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number |
5169 |
of live and free strings. |
5170 |
|
5171 |
*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of |
5172 |
strings that have been consed so far. |
5173 |
|
5174 |
|
5175 |
* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs |
5176 |
Lisp Manual |
5177 |
|
5178 |
** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes |
5179 |
mini-windows. |
5180 |
|
5181 |
** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third optional |
5182 |
argument, PARTIALLY. If a character is only partially visible, nil is |
5183 |
returned, unless PARTIALLY is non-nil. |
5184 |
|
5185 |
** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used. |
5186 |
|
5187 |
** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text. |
5188 |
|
5189 |
** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an |
5190 |
image. |
5191 |
|
5192 |
- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME |
5193 |
|
5194 |
Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT). |
5195 |
|
5196 |
SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes |
5197 |
measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical |
5198 |
character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default |
5199 |
font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. |
5200 |
FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame. |
5201 |
|
5202 |
** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image |
5203 |
has a mask bitmap. |
5204 |
|
5205 |
- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME |
5206 |
|
5207 |
Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap. |
5208 |
FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil |
5209 |
or omitted means use the selected frame. |
5210 |
|
5211 |
** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image |
5212 |
satisfying one of a list of specifications. |
5213 |
|
5214 |
** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now |
5215 |
optional. |
5216 |
|
5217 |
** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see |
5218 |
below). |
5219 |
|
5220 |
|
5221 |
* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1 |
5222 |
|
5223 |
** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used |
5224 |
to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs. |
5225 |
|
5226 |
Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying |
5227 |
text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground |
5228 |
is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on |
5229 |
your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on |
5230 |
laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to |
5231 |
just display it black instead. |
5232 |
|
5233 |
This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put |
5234 |
a line like |
5235 |
|
5236 |
(tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t) |
5237 |
|
5238 |
in your `.emacs'. |
5239 |
|
5240 |
** New face implementation. |
5241 |
|
5242 |
Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD |
5243 |
font names anymore and face merging now works as expected. |
5244 |
|
5245 |
*** New faces. |
5246 |
|
5247 |
Each face can specify the following display attributes: |
5248 |
|
5249 |
1. Font family or fontset alias name. |
5250 |
|
5251 |
2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set |
5252 |
width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'. |
5253 |
|
5254 |
3. Font height in 1/10pt |
5255 |
|
5256 |
4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'. |
5257 |
|
5258 |
5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'. |
5259 |
|
5260 |
6. Foreground color. |
5261 |
|
5262 |
7. Background color. |
5263 |
|
5264 |
8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color. |
5265 |
|
5266 |
9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video. |
5267 |
|
5268 |
10. A background stipple, a bitmap. |
5269 |
|
5270 |
11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color. |
5271 |
|
5272 |
12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what |
5273 |
color. |
5274 |
|
5275 |
13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its |
5276 |
color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance. |
5277 |
|
5278 |
Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the |
5279 |
same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different |
5280 |
frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named |
5281 |
faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector |
5282 |
with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each of the face |
5283 |
attributes mentioned above. |
5284 |
|
5285 |
There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face |
5286 |
definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly |
5287 |
created frames. |
5288 |
|
5289 |
A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified |
5290 |
have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called |
5291 |
`fully-specified'. |
5292 |
|
5293 |
*** Face merging. |
5294 |
|
5295 |
The display style of a given character in the text is determined by |
5296 |
combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any |
5297 |
aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text |
5298 |
properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure |
5299 |
that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always |
5300 |
results in a fully-specified face. |
5301 |
|
5302 |
*** Face realization. |
5303 |
|
5304 |
After all face attributes for a character have been determined by |
5305 |
merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The |
5306 |
realization process maps face attributes to what is physically |
5307 |
available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized |
5308 |
face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face |
5309 |
cache of the frame on which it was realized. |
5310 |
|
5311 |
Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the |
5312 |
character to display because different fonts and encodings are used |
5313 |
for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different |
5314 |
charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them. |
5315 |
|
5316 |
Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a |
5317 |
specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face |
5318 |
being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of |
5319 |
the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with |
5320 |
statically defined font name patterns in fontsets. |
5321 |
|
5322 |
In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function |
5323 |
`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those > |
5324 |
0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from |
5325 |
the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is |
5326 |
initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for |
5327 |
Emacs. |
5328 |
|
5329 |
Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with |
5330 |
`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same |
5331 |
registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent |
5332 |
with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only. |
5333 |
|
5334 |
**** Clearing face caches. |
5335 |
|
5336 |
The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches |
5337 |
on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload |
5338 |
unused fonts. |
5339 |
|
5340 |
*** Font selection. |
5341 |
|
5342 |
Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a |
5343 |
given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently |
5344 |
for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name. |
5345 |
|
5346 |
If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a |
5347 |
pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font |
5348 |
family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a |
5349 |
property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to |
5350 |
an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed. |
5351 |
|
5352 |
Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched |
5353 |
against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best |
5354 |
match for the given face attributes in this font list. |
5355 |
|
5356 |
Font selection can be influenced by the user. |
5357 |
|
5358 |
The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face |
5359 |
attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting |
5360 |
face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute |
5361 |
names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means |
5362 |
that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font |
5363 |
width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries |
5364 |
to find a best match for the specified font height, etc. |
5365 |
|
5366 |
Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify |
5367 |
alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face |
5368 |
doesn't exist. |
5369 |
|
5370 |
Setting `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows the user to specify |
5371 |
all alternative font registry names to try for a face specifying a |
5372 |
registry. |
5373 |
|
5374 |
Please note that the interpretations of the above two variables are |
5375 |
slightly different. |
5376 |
|
5377 |
Setting face-ignored-fonts allows the user to ignore specific fonts. |
5378 |
|
5379 |
|
5380 |
**** Scalable fonts |
5381 |
|
5382 |
Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default, |
5383 |
since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86 |
5384 |
servers. |
5385 |
|
5386 |
To enable scalable font use, set the variable |
5387 |
`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use |
5388 |
scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used. |
5389 |
Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A |
5390 |
scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from |
5391 |
that list. Example: |
5392 |
|
5393 |
(setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$")) |
5394 |
|
5395 |
allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'. |
5396 |
|
5397 |
*** Functions and variables related to font selection. |
5398 |
|
5399 |
- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME |
5400 |
|
5401 |
Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY |
5402 |
is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a |
5403 |
string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'. |
5404 |
|
5405 |
If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of |
5406 |
the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P |
5407 |
FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name. |
5408 |
POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and |
5409 |
SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font. |
5410 |
These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil |
5411 |
if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and |
5412 |
REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of |
5413 |
the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting |
5414 |
of the face font sort order. |
5415 |
|
5416 |
- Function: x-font-family-list |
5417 |
|
5418 |
Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is |
5419 |
omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses |
5420 |
(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is |
5421 |
non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch. |
5422 |
|
5423 |
- Variable: font-list-limit |
5424 |
|
5425 |
Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions |
5426 |
won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a |
5427 |
matching font. The default is currently 100. |
5428 |
|
5429 |
*** Setting face attributes. |
5430 |
|
5431 |
For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible |
5432 |
with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now |
5433 |
implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and |
5434 |
`face-attribute'. |
5435 |
|
5436 |
Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword |
5437 |
symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'. |
5438 |
|
5439 |
The following attributes are recognized: |
5440 |
|
5441 |
`:family' |
5442 |
|
5443 |
VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'', |
5444 |
or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*' |
5445 |
and `?' are allowed. |
5446 |
|
5447 |
`:width' |
5448 |
|
5449 |
VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use. |
5450 |
It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed', |
5451 |
`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded', |
5452 |
`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'. |
5453 |
|
5454 |
`:height' |
5455 |
|
5456 |
VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use |
5457 |
in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to |
5458 |
scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old |
5459 |
height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height. |
5460 |
|
5461 |
`:weight' |
5462 |
|
5463 |
VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the |
5464 |
symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal', |
5465 |
`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'. |
5466 |
|
5467 |
`:slant' |
5468 |
|
5469 |
VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the |
5470 |
symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or |
5471 |
`reverse-oblique'. |
5472 |
|
5473 |
`:foreground', `:background' |
5474 |
|
5475 |
VALUE must be a color name, a string. |
5476 |
|
5477 |
`:underline' |
5478 |
|
5479 |
VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If |
5480 |
VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is |
5481 |
a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly |
5482 |
don't underline. |
5483 |
|
5484 |
`:overline' |
5485 |
|
5486 |
VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If |
5487 |
VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a |
5488 |
string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't |
5489 |
overline. |
5490 |
|
5491 |
`:strike-through' |
5492 |
|
5493 |
VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line |
5494 |
striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the |
5495 |
face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE |
5496 |
is nil, explicitly don't strike through. |
5497 |
|
5498 |
`:box' |
5499 |
|
5500 |
VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn |
5501 |
around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If |
5502 |
VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color |
5503 |
of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name, |
5504 |
and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise, |
5505 |
VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH |
5506 |
:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from |
5507 |
the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as |
5508 |
specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it |
5509 |
defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is |
5510 |
the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background |
5511 |
color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box |
5512 |
should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking |
5513 |
like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box |
5514 |
that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if |
5515 |
the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D |
5516 |
box. |
5517 |
|
5518 |
`:inverse-video' |
5519 |
|
5520 |
VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in |
5521 |
inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil. |
5522 |
|
5523 |
`:stipple' |
5524 |
|
5525 |
If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data. |
5526 |
The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are |
5527 |
searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH |
5528 |
HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA |
5529 |
is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means |
5530 |
explicitly don't use a stipple pattern. |
5531 |
|
5532 |
For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight', |
5533 |
and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name: |
5534 |
|
5535 |
`:font' |
5536 |
|
5537 |
Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid |
5538 |
XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font |
5539 |
is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous |
5540 |
versions of Emacs. |
5541 |
|
5542 |
For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can |
5543 |
be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE |
5544 |
must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed." |
5545 |
|
5546 |
Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and |
5547 |
`defface'. |
5548 |
|
5549 |
`:inherit' |
5550 |
|
5551 |
VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list |
5552 |
of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face |
5553 |
like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces. |
5554 |
|
5555 |
*** Face attributes and X resources |
5556 |
|
5557 |
The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes |
5558 |
from X resources: |
5559 |
|
5560 |
Face attribute X resource class |
5561 |
----------------------------------------------------------------------- |
5562 |
:family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily |
5563 |
:width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth |
5564 |
:height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight |
5565 |
:weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight |
5566 |
:slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant |
5567 |
foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground |
5568 |
:background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground |
5569 |
:overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline |
5570 |
:strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough |
5571 |
:box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox |
5572 |
:underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline |
5573 |
:inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse |
5574 |
:stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple |
5575 |
or attributeBackgroundPixmap |
5576 |
Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap |
5577 |
:font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont |
5578 |
:bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold |
5579 |
:italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic |
5580 |
:font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont |
5581 |
|
5582 |
*** Text property `face'. |
5583 |
|
5584 |
The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face |
5585 |
specification or a list of such specifications. Each face |
5586 |
specification can be |
5587 |
|
5588 |
1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face. |
5589 |
|
5590 |
2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each |
5591 |
KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value |
5592 |
for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute' |
5593 |
for face attribute names. |
5594 |
|
5595 |
3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or |
5596 |
(BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is |
5597 |
for compatibility with previous Emacs versions. |
5598 |
|
5599 |
** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals. |
5600 |
|
5601 |
The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use |
5602 |
on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on |
5603 |
the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by |
5604 |
default. You can get defined colors with a call to |
5605 |
`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be |
5606 |
used to clear the mapping table. |
5607 |
|
5608 |
** Unified support for colors independent of frame type. |
5609 |
|
5610 |
The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values', |
5611 |
and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose |
5612 |
type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style |
5613 |
color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame |
5614 |
display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the |
5615 |
old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and |
5616 |
`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for |
5617 |
compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs |
5618 |
should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to |
5619 |
modify their color-related behavior. |
5620 |
|
5621 |
The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for |
5622 |
any frame type. |
5623 |
|
5624 |
** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities. |
5625 |
|
5626 |
The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p', |
5627 |
`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens', |
5628 |
`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width', |
5629 |
`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under', |
5630 |
`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and |
5631 |
`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular |
5632 |
display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing |
5633 |
the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling |
5634 |
platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'. |
5635 |
|
5636 |
The new function `display-images-p' returns non-nil if a particular |
5637 |
display can display image files. |
5638 |
|
5639 |
** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer. |
5640 |
|
5641 |
This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to. |
5642 |
To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize |
5643 |
the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the |
5644 |
`Inviolable' option. |
5645 |
|
5646 |
The function `minibuffer-prompt-end' returns the current position of the |
5647 |
end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current. |
5648 |
Otherwise, it returns `(point-min)'. |
5649 |
|
5650 |
** New `field' abstraction in buffers. |
5651 |
|
5652 |
There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs |
5653 |
buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field' |
5654 |
property (which can be a text property or an overlay). |
5655 |
|
5656 |
Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence, |
5657 |
forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come |
5658 |
to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will |
5659 |
not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement |
5660 |
commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field |
5661 |
boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding |
5662 |
`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these |
5663 |
functions. |
5664 |
|
5665 |
Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in |
5666 |
a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common |
5667 |
editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt. |
5668 |
|
5669 |
The following functions are defined for operating on fields: |
5670 |
|
5671 |
- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY |
5672 |
|
5673 |
Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS. |
5674 |
|
5675 |
A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
5676 |
If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the |
5677 |
constrained position if that is different. |
5678 |
|
5679 |
If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable |
5680 |
positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument |
5681 |
ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is |
5682 |
constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property |
5683 |
as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
5684 |
is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent |
5685 |
fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with |
5686 |
the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is |
5687 |
also considered to be `on the boundary'. |
5688 |
|
5689 |
If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining |
5690 |
NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned |
5691 |
unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like |
5692 |
C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries |
5693 |
only in the case where they can still move to the right line. |
5694 |
|
5695 |
If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has |
5696 |
a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored. |
5697 |
|
5698 |
Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil. |
5699 |
|
5700 |
- Function: delete-field &optional POS |
5701 |
|
5702 |
Delete the field surrounding POS. |
5703 |
A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
5704 |
If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
5705 |
|
5706 |
- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
5707 |
|
5708 |
Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS. |
5709 |
A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
5710 |
If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
5711 |
If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its |
5712 |
field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned. |
5713 |
|
5714 |
- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
5715 |
|
5716 |
Return the end of the field surrounding POS. |
5717 |
A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
5718 |
If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
5719 |
If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field, |
5720 |
then the end of the *following* field is returned. |
5721 |
|
5722 |
- Function: field-string &optional POS |
5723 |
|
5724 |
Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string. |
5725 |
A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
5726 |
If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
5727 |
|
5728 |
- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS |
5729 |
|
5730 |
Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties. |
5731 |
A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
5732 |
If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
5733 |
|
5734 |
** Image support. |
5735 |
|
5736 |
Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving |
5737 |
strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of |
5738 |
(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value |
5739 |
replaces the display of the characters having that property. |
5740 |
|
5741 |
If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of |
5742 |
`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If |
5743 |
AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a |
5744 |
window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal |
5745 |
area. |
5746 |
|
5747 |
IMAGE is an image specification. |
5748 |
|
5749 |
*** Image specifications |
5750 |
|
5751 |
Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS |
5752 |
is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each |
5753 |
specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a |
5754 |
symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not |
5755 |
described below are ignored. |
5756 |
|
5757 |
The following is a list of properties all image types share. |
5758 |
|
5759 |
`:ascent ASCENT' |
5760 |
|
5761 |
ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'. |
5762 |
If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height |
5763 |
to use for its ascent. |
5764 |
|
5765 |
If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the |
5766 |
image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in. |
5767 |
|
5768 |
If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a |
5769 |
centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position |
5770 |
of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and |
5771 |
overlays that apply to the image. |
5772 |
|
5773 |
`:margin MARGIN' |
5774 |
|
5775 |
MARGIN must be either a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put |
5776 |
as margin around the image, or a pair (X . Y) with X specifying the |
5777 |
horizontal margin and Y specifying the vertical margin. Default is 0. |
5778 |
|
5779 |
`:relief RELIEF' |
5780 |
|
5781 |
RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief |
5782 |
around an image. |
5783 |
|
5784 |
`:conversion ALGO' |
5785 |
|
5786 |
Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. |
5787 |
|
5788 |
ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss'' |
5789 |
edge-detection algorithm to the image. |
5790 |
|
5791 |
ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means |
5792 |
apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a |
5793 |
nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at |
5794 |
position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels |
5795 |
around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the |
5796 |
neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the |
5797 |
transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at |
5798 |
x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown |
5799 |
below. |
5800 |
|
5801 |
(x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1 |
5802 |
x-1/y x/y x+1/y |
5803 |
x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1) |
5804 |
|
5805 |
The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color |
5806 |
resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels, |
5807 |
multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum |
5808 |
of the factors' absolute values. |
5809 |
|
5810 |
Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of |
5811 |
|
5812 |
(1 0 0 |
5813 |
0 0 0 |
5814 |
9 9 -1) |
5815 |
|
5816 |
Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of |
5817 |
|
5818 |
( 2 -1 0 |
5819 |
-1 0 1 |
5820 |
0 1 -2) |
5821 |
|
5822 |
ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks |
5823 |
``disabled''. |
5824 |
|
5825 |
`:mask MASK' |
5826 |
|
5827 |
If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for |
5828 |
the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the |
5829 |
image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the |
5830 |
background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the |
5831 |
image, assuming the most frequently occurring color from the corners is |
5832 |
the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED |
5833 |
GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the |
5834 |
image. |
5835 |
|
5836 |
If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images |
5837 |
in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying |
5838 |
`:mask nil'. |
5839 |
|
5840 |
`:file FILE' |
5841 |
|
5842 |
Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it, |
5843 |
search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support |
5844 |
building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property |
5845 |
may be present in the image specification. |
5846 |
|
5847 |
`:data DATA' |
5848 |
|
5849 |
Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet |
5850 |
supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be |
5851 |
present in an image specification, but not both. All image types |
5852 |
support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA. |
5853 |
|
5854 |
*** Supported image types |
5855 |
|
5856 |
**** XBM, image type `xbm'. |
5857 |
|
5858 |
XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image |
5859 |
properties supported are |
5860 |
|
5861 |
`:foreground FG' |
5862 |
|
5863 |
FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil |
5864 |
meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground. |
5865 |
|
5866 |
`:background BG' |
5867 |
|
5868 |
BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil |
5869 |
meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color. |
5870 |
|
5871 |
XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this |
5872 |
case, the image specification must contain the following properties |
5873 |
instead of a `:file' property. |
5874 |
|
5875 |
`:width WIDTH' |
5876 |
|
5877 |
WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels. |
5878 |
|
5879 |
`:height HEIGHT' |
5880 |
|
5881 |
HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels. |
5882 |
|
5883 |
`:data DATA' |
5884 |
|
5885 |
DATA must be either |
5886 |
|
5887 |
1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must |
5888 |
have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT |
5889 |
|
5890 |
2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT |
5891 |
|
5892 |
3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the |
5893 |
bitmap. |
5894 |
|
5895 |
4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor |
5896 |
height may be specified in this case because these are defined |
5897 |
in the file. |
5898 |
|
5899 |
**** XPM, image type `xpm' |
5900 |
|
5901 |
XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package |
5902 |
`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is |
5903 |
found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via |
5904 |
`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'. |
5905 |
|
5906 |
Additional image properties supported are: |
5907 |
|
5908 |
`:color-symbols SYMBOLS' |
5909 |
|
5910 |
SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the |
5911 |
name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color |
5912 |
name. |
5913 |
|
5914 |
XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case, |
5915 |
add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property. |
5916 |
|
5917 |
The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able |
5918 |
to display compressed images. |
5919 |
|
5920 |
**** PBM, image type `pbm' |
5921 |
|
5922 |
PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and |
5923 |
mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for |
5924 |
mono images are |
5925 |
|
5926 |
`:foreground FG' |
5927 |
|
5928 |
FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil |
5929 |
meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground. |
5930 |
|
5931 |
`:background FG' |
5932 |
|
5933 |
BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil |
5934 |
meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color. |
5935 |
|
5936 |
**** JPEG, image type `jpeg' |
5937 |
|
5938 |
Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg', |
5939 |
package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties |
5940 |
are: |
5941 |
|
5942 |
**** TIFF, image type `tiff' |
5943 |
|
5944 |
Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff', |
5945 |
package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image |
5946 |
properties defined. |
5947 |
|
5948 |
**** GIF, image type `gif' |
5949 |
|
5950 |
Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package |
5951 |
`libungif-4.1.0', or later. |
5952 |
|
5953 |
Additional image properties supported are: |
5954 |
|
5955 |
`:index INDEX' |
5956 |
|
5957 |
INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a |
5958 |
multi-image GIF file. An error is signaled if INDEX is too large. |
5959 |
|
5960 |
This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs. |
5961 |
For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file |
5962 |
at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images |
5963 |
every 0.1 seconds. |
5964 |
|
5965 |
(defun show-anim (file max) |
5966 |
"Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages." |
5967 |
(display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t)) |
5968 |
|
5969 |
(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time) |
5970 |
(when (= idx max) |
5971 |
(setq idx 0)) |
5972 |
(let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx))) |
5973 |
(save-excursion |
5974 |
(set-buffer buffer) |
5975 |
(goto-char (point-min)) |
5976 |
(unless first-time (delete-char 1)) |
5977 |
(insert-image img "x")) |
5978 |
(run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil))) |
5979 |
|
5980 |
**** PNG, image type `png' |
5981 |
|
5982 |
Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng', |
5983 |
package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image |
5984 |
properties defined. |
5985 |
|
5986 |
**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'. |
5987 |
|
5988 |
Additional image properties supported are: |
5989 |
|
5990 |
`:pt-width WIDTH' |
5991 |
|
5992 |
WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an |
5993 |
integer. This is a required property. |
5994 |
|
5995 |
`:pt-height HEIGHT' |
5996 |
|
5997 |
HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT |
5998 |
must be a integer. This is an required property. |
5999 |
|
6000 |
`:bounding-box BOX' |
6001 |
|
6002 |
BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of |
6003 |
the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS |
6004 |
files. This is an required property. |
6005 |
|
6006 |
Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See |
6007 |
lisp/gs.el. |
6008 |
|
6009 |
*** Lisp interface. |
6010 |
|
6011 |
The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types |
6012 |
which are supported in the current configuration. |
6013 |
|
6014 |
Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when |
6015 |
they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds. |
6016 |
The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache |
6017 |
manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all |
6018 |
images with `equal' specifications share the same image. |
6019 |
|
6020 |
*** Simplified image API, image.el |
6021 |
|
6022 |
The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image |
6023 |
creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image' |
6024 |
can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to |
6025 |
define an image based on available image types. The functions |
6026 |
`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a |
6027 |
buffer. |
6028 |
|
6029 |
** Display margins. |
6030 |
|
6031 |
Windows can now have margins which are used for special text |
6032 |
and images. |
6033 |
|
6034 |
To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables |
6035 |
`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call |
6036 |
`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to |
6037 |
obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and |
6038 |
`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying |
6039 |
the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update |
6040 |
of the display margins. |
6041 |
|
6042 |
You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property |
6043 |
containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is |
6044 |
one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a |
6045 |
string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later |
6046 |
in this file). |
6047 |
|
6048 |
** Help display |
6049 |
|
6050 |
Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse |
6051 |
moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property |
6052 |
`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line |
6053 |
that have a `help-echo' property. |
6054 |
|
6055 |
If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function |
6056 |
is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is |
6057 |
the window in which the help was found. |
6058 |
|
6059 |
If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the |
6060 |
`help-echo' text property was found. |
6061 |
|
6062 |
If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and |
6063 |
POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse. |
6064 |
|
6065 |
If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with |
6066 |
the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the |
6067 |
mouse. |
6068 |
|
6069 |
If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a |
6070 |
string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string. |
6071 |
|
6072 |
For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to |
6073 |
determine the help to display. If their definition contains a |
6074 |
property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string. |
6075 |
For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is |
6076 |
used as help string. |
6077 |
|
6078 |
The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays |
6079 |
the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window |
6080 |
causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area. |
6081 |
|
6082 |
** Vertical fractional scrolling. |
6083 |
|
6084 |
The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels. |
6085 |
This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible. |
6086 |
|
6087 |
The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical |
6088 |
scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height. |
6089 |
The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical |
6090 |
scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be |
6091 |
used. |
6092 |
|
6093 |
(global-set-key [A-down] |
6094 |
#'(lambda () |
6095 |
(interactive) |
6096 |
(set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
6097 |
(+ 0.5 (window-vscroll))))) |
6098 |
(global-set-key [A-up] |
6099 |
#'(lambda () |
6100 |
(interactive) |
6101 |
(set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
6102 |
(- (window-vscroll) 0.5))))) |
6103 |
|
6104 |
** New hook `fontification-functions'. |
6105 |
|
6106 |
Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay |
6107 |
when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This |
6108 |
variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function |
6109 |
is called with one argument, POS. |
6110 |
|
6111 |
At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more |
6112 |
characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them |
6113 |
as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text |
6114 |
property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the |
6115 |
`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to. |
6116 |
|
6117 |
** Tool bar support. |
6118 |
|
6119 |
Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame |
6120 |
parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar") |
6121 |
controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value |
6122 |
suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and |
6123 |
`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed |
6124 |
automatically so that all tool bar items are visible. |
6125 |
|
6126 |
*** Tool bar item definitions |
6127 |
|
6128 |
Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key |
6129 |
`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)' |
6130 |
where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'. |
6131 |
|
6132 |
CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is |
6133 |
evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in |
6134 |
the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help' |
6135 |
property (see below). |
6136 |
|
6137 |
BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as |
6138 |
binding are currently ignored. |
6139 |
|
6140 |
The following properties are recognized: |
6141 |
|
6142 |
`:enable FORM'. |
6143 |
|
6144 |
FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled |
6145 |
or disabled. |
6146 |
|
6147 |
`:visible FORM' |
6148 |
|
6149 |
FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed. |
6150 |
|
6151 |
`:filter FUNCTION' |
6152 |
|
6153 |
FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which |
6154 |
FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is |
6155 |
used instead of BINDING to display this item. |
6156 |
|
6157 |
`:button (TYPE SELECTED)' |
6158 |
|
6159 |
TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated |
6160 |
and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not. |
6161 |
|
6162 |
`:image IMAGES' |
6163 |
|
6164 |
IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four |
6165 |
image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the |
6166 |
meaning of each of the four elements: |
6167 |
|
6168 |
Index Use when item is |
6169 |
---------------------------------------- |
6170 |
0 enabled and selected |
6171 |
1 enabled and deselected |
6172 |
2 disabled and selected |
6173 |
3 disabled and deselected |
6174 |
|
6175 |
If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection |
6176 |
algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state. |
6177 |
|
6178 |
`:help HELP-STRING'. |
6179 |
|
6180 |
Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help |
6181 |
is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item. |
6182 |
|
6183 |
The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding |
6184 |
toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used |
6185 |
to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the |
6186 |
menu bar. |
6187 |
|
6188 |
The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar |
6189 |
dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set |
6190 |
buffer-locally to override the global map. |
6191 |
|
6192 |
*** Tool-bar-related variables. |
6193 |
|
6194 |
If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically |
6195 |
resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger |
6196 |
than 1/4 of the frame's size. |
6197 |
|
6198 |
If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be |
6199 |
raised when the mouse moves over them. |
6200 |
|
6201 |
You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting |
6202 |
`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of |
6203 |
pixels, or a pair of integers (X . Y) specifying horizontal and |
6204 |
vertical margins . Default is 1. |
6205 |
|
6206 |
You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting |
6207 |
`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3. |
6208 |
|
6209 |
*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers. |
6210 |
|
6211 |
You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on |
6212 |
a tool bar item. If |
6213 |
|
6214 |
(define-key global-map [tool-bar shell] |
6215 |
'(menu-item "Shell" shell |
6216 |
:image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm"))) |
6217 |
|
6218 |
is the original tool bar item definition, then |
6219 |
|
6220 |
(define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command) |
6221 |
|
6222 |
makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same |
6223 |
item. |
6224 |
|
6225 |
** Mode line changes. |
6226 |
|
6227 |
*** Mouse-sensitive mode line. |
6228 |
|
6229 |
The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there |
6230 |
that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display |
6231 |
a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line. |
6232 |
|
6233 |
1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has |
6234 |
a `local-map' text property. |
6235 |
|
6236 |
2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and |
6237 |
that format specifier has a `local-map' property. |
6238 |
|
6239 |
3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM |
6240 |
is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a |
6241 |
`local-map' property. |
6242 |
|
6243 |
The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo' |
6244 |
properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an |
6245 |
example. |
6246 |
|
6247 |
*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is |
6248 |
evaluated and the result is used as mode line element. |
6249 |
|
6250 |
*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local |
6251 |
variable mode-line-format to nil. |
6252 |
|
6253 |
*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window. |
6254 |
|
6255 |
This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable |
6256 |
`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are |
6257 |
completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and |
6258 |
`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top |
6259 |
line. |
6260 |
|
6261 |
The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face |
6262 |
`header-line'. |
6263 |
|
6264 |
The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a |
6265 |
position in the header-line. |
6266 |
|
6267 |
** Text property `display' |
6268 |
|
6269 |
The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, |
6270 |
replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is |
6271 |
also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of |
6272 |
the `display' property should be a display specification, as described |
6273 |
below, or a list or vector containing display specifications. |
6274 |
|
6275 |
*** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas |
6276 |
|
6277 |
To replace the text having the `display' property with some other |
6278 |
text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'. |
6279 |
|
6280 |
If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left |
6281 |
marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in |
6282 |
the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING |
6283 |
is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the |
6284 |
simpler form STRING as property value. |
6285 |
|
6286 |
*** Variable width and height spaces |
6287 |
|
6288 |
To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display |
6289 |
specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is |
6290 |
`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal |
6291 |
area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right |
6292 |
marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is |
6293 |
displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the |
6294 |
simpler form STRETCH as property value. |
6295 |
|
6296 |
The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space |
6297 |
PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the |
6298 |
properties described below. |
6299 |
|
6300 |
The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the |
6301 |
characters having the `display' property. |
6302 |
|
6303 |
- :width WIDTH |
6304 |
|
6305 |
Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal |
6306 |
character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number. |
6307 |
|
6308 |
- :relative-width FACTOR |
6309 |
|
6310 |
Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the |
6311 |
first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the |
6312 |
same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the |
6313 |
width of that character by FACTOR. |
6314 |
|
6315 |
- :align-to HPOS |
6316 |
|
6317 |
Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The |
6318 |
value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width. |
6319 |
|
6320 |
Exactly one of the above properties should be used. |
6321 |
|
6322 |
- :height HEIGHT |
6323 |
|
6324 |
Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the |
6325 |
normal line height. |
6326 |
|
6327 |
- :relative-height FACTOR |
6328 |
|
6329 |
The height of the space is computed as the product of the height |
6330 |
of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR. |
6331 |
|
6332 |
- :ascent ASCENT |
6333 |
|
6334 |
Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be |
6335 |
used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the |
6336 |
baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or |
6337 |
equal to 100. |
6338 |
|
6339 |
You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together. |
6340 |
|
6341 |
*** Images |
6342 |
|
6343 |
A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION |
6344 |
. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces, |
6345 |
in the display, the characters having this display specification in |
6346 |
their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', |
6347 |
the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is |
6348 |
`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal |
6349 |
area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in |
6350 |
the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE |
6351 |
as display specification. |
6352 |
|
6353 |
*** Other display properties |
6354 |
|
6355 |
- (space-width FACTOR) |
6356 |
|
6357 |
Specifies that space characters in the text having that property |
6358 |
should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an |
6359 |
integer or float. |
6360 |
|
6361 |
- (height HEIGHT) |
6362 |
|
6363 |
Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger. |
6364 |
|
6365 |
If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that |
6366 |
means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of |
6367 |
the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A |
6368 |
``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which |
6369 |
a font is available counts as a step. |
6370 |
|
6371 |
If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times |
6372 |
as tall as the frame's default font. |
6373 |
|
6374 |
If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current |
6375 |
height as argument. The function should return the new height to use. |
6376 |
|
6377 |
Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol |
6378 |
`height' bound to the current specified font height. |
6379 |
|
6380 |
- (raise FACTOR) |
6381 |
|
6382 |
FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current |
6383 |
font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters |
6384 |
raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The |
6385 |
amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the |
6386 |
`height' subproperty. |
6387 |
|
6388 |
*** Conditional display properties |
6389 |
|
6390 |
All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification |
6391 |
has the form `(when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC applies |
6392 |
only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated. During the |
6393 |
evaluation, `object' is bound to the string or buffer having the |
6394 |
conditional display property; `position' and `buffer-position' are |
6395 |
bound to the position within `object' and the buffer position where |
6396 |
the display property was found, respectively. Both positions can be |
6397 |
different when object is a string. |
6398 |
|
6399 |
The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to |
6400 |
`(when t . SPEC)'. |
6401 |
|
6402 |
** New menu separator types. |
6403 |
|
6404 |
Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with |
6405 |
item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are |
6406 |
treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used |
6407 |
to specify other menu separator types. |
6408 |
|
6409 |
- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine' |
6410 |
|
6411 |
No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the |
6412 |
separator occurs. |
6413 |
|
6414 |
- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine' |
6415 |
|
6416 |
A single line in the menu's foreground color. |
6417 |
|
6418 |
- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine' |
6419 |
|
6420 |
A double line in the menu's foreground color. |
6421 |
|
6422 |
- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine' |
6423 |
|
6424 |
A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color. |
6425 |
|
6426 |
- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine' |
6427 |
|
6428 |
A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color. |
6429 |
|
6430 |
- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn' |
6431 |
|
6432 |
A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the form |
6433 |
displayed for item names consisting of dashes only. |
6434 |
|
6435 |
- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut' |
6436 |
|
6437 |
A single line with 3D raised appearance. |
6438 |
|
6439 |
- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash' |
6440 |
|
6441 |
A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance. |
6442 |
|
6443 |
- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash' |
6444 |
|
6445 |
A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance. |
6446 |
|
6447 |
- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn' |
6448 |
|
6449 |
Two lines with 3D sunken appearance. |
6450 |
|
6451 |
- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut' |
6452 |
|
6453 |
Two lines with 3D raised appearance. |
6454 |
|
6455 |
- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash' |
6456 |
|
6457 |
Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance. |
6458 |
|
6459 |
- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash' |
6460 |
|
6461 |
Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance. |
6462 |
|
6463 |
Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like |
6464 |
the corresponding single-line separators. |
6465 |
|
6466 |
** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors. |
6467 |
|
6468 |
The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and |
6469 |
`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors. |
6470 |
Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify |
6471 |
that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars, |
6472 |
default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the |
6473 |
default background is the background color of the frame, and the |
6474 |
default foreground is black. |
6475 |
|
6476 |
The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground' |
6477 |
(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class |
6478 |
`ScrollBarBackground'). |
6479 |
|
6480 |
Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource |
6481 |
settings for scroll bar colors. |
6482 |
|
6483 |
** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent |
6484 |
display updates from being interrupted when input is pending. |
6485 |
|
6486 |
** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it |
6487 |
starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based |
6488 |
on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued |
6489 |
line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from |
6490 |
the original window start. |
6491 |
|
6492 |
** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions |
6493 |
`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed |
6494 |
now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented. |
6495 |
|
6496 |
** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height. |
6497 |
|
6498 |
A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable |
6499 |
`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes |
6500 |
windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any |
6501 |
other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height. |
6502 |
|
6503 |
The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer |
6504 |
fixed-width and fixed-height. |
6505 |
|
6506 |
(set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t) |
6507 |
|
6508 |
A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is |
6509 |
fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the |
6510 |
window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To |
6511 |
change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed' |
6512 |
temporarily to nil, for example |
6513 |
|
6514 |
(let ((window-size-fixed nil)) |
6515 |
(enlarge-window 10)) |
6516 |
|
6517 |
Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically, |
6518 |
or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error. |
6519 |
|
6520 |
** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS |
6521 |
terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape |
6522 |
to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter |
6523 |
overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is |
6524 |
horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't |
6525 |
support a vertical-bar cursor). |
6526 |
|
6527 |
|
6528 |
|
6529 |
* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes |
6530 |
|
6531 |
** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard |
6532 |
input. |
6533 |
|
6534 |
** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos. |
6535 |
|
6536 |
** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages. |
6537 |
|
6538 |
** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not |
6539 |
only for character input, but also in incremental search. The |
6540 |
exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets |
6541 |
(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence |
6542 |
(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search. |
6543 |
|
6544 |
** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has |
6545 |
been added. |
6546 |
|
6547 |
|
6548 |
* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change |
6549 |
|
6550 |
** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added. |
6551 |
|
6552 |
|
6553 |
|
6554 |
* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes. |
6555 |
|
6556 |
** Not new, but not mentioned before: |
6557 |
M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark. |
6558 |
|
6559 |
* Changes in Emacs 20.4 |
6560 |
|
6561 |
** Init file may be called .emacs.el. |
6562 |
|
6563 |
You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'. |
6564 |
Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name |
6565 |
`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way. |
6566 |
|
6567 |
If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file |
6568 |
is the one that is used. |
6569 |
|
6570 |
** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return |
6571 |
the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous). |
6572 |
Also, you can specify a place to put the error output, |
6573 |
separate from the command's regular output. |
6574 |
Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer |
6575 |
says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name. |
6576 |
In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies |
6577 |
the buffer name. |
6578 |
|
6579 |
When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error |
6580 |
output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate |
6581 |
it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not |
6582 |
cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there. |
6583 |
|
6584 |
** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in |
6585 |
the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom, |
6586 |
is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers |
6587 |
created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs. |
6588 |
|
6589 |
** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For |
6590 |
example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names |
6591 |
match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the |
6592 |
quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name. |
6593 |
|
6594 |
** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches |
6595 |
now have the same feature as occur and query-replace: |
6596 |
if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then |
6597 |
they never ignore case. |
6598 |
|
6599 |
** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned |
6600 |
under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually |
6601 |
applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents |
6602 |
of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or |
6603 |
just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs |
6604 |
convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a |
6605 |
part of the general feature of coding system conversion. |
6606 |
|
6607 |
If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to |
6608 |
the same format that was used in the file before. |
6609 |
|
6610 |
You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable |
6611 |
`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group. |
6612 |
|
6613 |
** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been |
6614 |
renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling. |
6615 |
This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected. |
6616 |
|
6617 |
** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed. |
6618 |
The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a |
6619 |
buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for |
6620 |
your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format |
6621 |
is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual |
6622 |
end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for |
6623 |
Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac). |
6624 |
|
6625 |
The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos, |
6626 |
eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings, |
6627 |
control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line |
6628 |
format. You can now customize these variables. |
6629 |
|
6630 |
** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a |
6631 |
filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a |
6632 |
filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of |
6633 |
enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil. |
6634 |
|
6635 |
** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode |
6636 |
in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given |
6637 |
windows just big enough to hold the whole contents. |
6638 |
|
6639 |
** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function |
6640 |
dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file |
6641 |
doesn't have any effect. |
6642 |
|
6643 |
** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process, |
6644 |
not one per buffer. |
6645 |
|
6646 |
** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to |
6647 |
use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line: |
6648 |
(add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup) |
6649 |
|
6650 |
** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el. |
6651 |
To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the |
6652 |
`auto-show-mode' command. |
6653 |
|
6654 |
** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to |
6655 |
avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous |
6656 |
versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font |
6657 |
choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change |
6658 |
occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then. |
6659 |
|
6660 |
** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's |
6661 |
cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel. |
6662 |
|
6663 |
** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the |
6664 |
character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this |
6665 |
feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil. |
6666 |
|
6667 |
** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at |
6668 |
the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an |
6669 |
interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode |
6670 |
and variable specification, as well as on the first line. |
6671 |
|
6672 |
** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters. |
6673 |
|
6674 |
The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system |
6675 |
that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and |
6676 |
one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that |
6677 |
codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character |
6678 |
set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc. |
6679 |
|
6680 |
Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates |
6681 |
from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported. |
6682 |
|
6683 |
IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have |
6684 |
equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to |
6685 |
a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to |
6686 |
`?' on other systems. |
6687 |
|
6688 |
IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this |
6689 |
feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on |
6690 |
Unix. |
6691 |
|
6692 |
Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the |
6693 |
current codepage when it starts. |
6694 |
|
6695 |
** Mail changes |
6696 |
|
6697 |
*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if |
6698 |
`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime', |
6699 |
appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if |
6700 |
non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other |
6701 |
MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three |
6702 |
headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is |
6703 |
latin-1: |
6704 |
|
6705 |
MIME-version: 1.0 |
6706 |
Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1 |
6707 |
Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit |
6708 |
|
6709 |
*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the |
6710 |
default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than |
6711 |
default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than |
6712 |
sendmail-coding-system and the local value of |
6713 |
buffer-file-coding-system. |
6714 |
|
6715 |
You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set |
6716 |
sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing |
6717 |
mail. |
6718 |
|
6719 |
*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters, |
6720 |
if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them, |
6721 |
Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a |
6722 |
list of possible coding systems. |
6723 |
|
6724 |
** CC Mode changes |
6725 |
|
6726 |
*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major |
6727 |
modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no |
6728 |
longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's |
6729 |
docstring for details. |
6730 |
|
6731 |
*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic |
6732 |
symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is |
6733 |
found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a |
6734 |
prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied |
6735 |
lineup functions use this feature currently. |
6736 |
|
6737 |
*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and |
6738 |
"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java. |
6739 |
|
6740 |
*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for |
6741 |
"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines. |
6742 |
|
6743 |
*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately |
6744 |
from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new |
6745 |
symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on |
6746 |
c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for |
6747 |
anonymous classes. |
6748 |
|
6749 |
*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific |
6750 |
syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont |
6751 |
|
6752 |
*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol |
6753 |
inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike |
6754 |
support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup |
6755 |
function c-lineup-inexpr-block. |
6756 |
|
6757 |
*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists |
6758 |
(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open |
6759 |
brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's. |
6760 |
c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces |
6761 |
(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified). |
6762 |
|
6763 |
*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default. |
6764 |
|
6765 |
*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line. |
6766 |
|
6767 |
*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren) |
6768 |
for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed. |
6769 |
|
6770 |
*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero. |
6771 |
|
6772 |
*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation |
6773 |
associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace. |
6774 |
This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some |
6775 |
circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the |
6776 |
class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that). |
6777 |
|
6778 |
** Gnus changes. |
6779 |
|
6780 |
*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been |
6781 |
added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the |
6782 |
Gnus manual for the full story. |
6783 |
|
6784 |
*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than |
6785 |
before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft |
6786 |
group, which is created automatically. |
6787 |
|
6788 |
*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header |
6789 |
values. |
6790 |
|
6791 |
*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's. |
6792 |
|
6793 |
*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message |
6794 |
outside the region: `C-c C-v'. |
6795 |
|
6796 |
*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with |
6797 |
`C-u C-c C-c'. |
6798 |
|
6799 |
*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization. |
6800 |
|
6801 |
*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit |
6802 |
re-highlighting of the article buffer. |
6803 |
|
6804 |
*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'. |
6805 |
|
6806 |
*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic |
6807 |
Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details. |
6808 |
|
6809 |
*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix |
6810 |
`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file. |
6811 |
|
6812 |
*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater |
6813 |
control over simplification. |
6814 |
|
6815 |
*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread. |
6816 |
|
6817 |
*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the |
6818 |
limit. |
6819 |
|
6820 |
*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text. |
6821 |
|
6822 |
*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'. |
6823 |
|
6824 |
*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed. |
6825 |
If you used this function in your initialization files, you must |
6826 |
rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead. |
6827 |
|
6828 |
*** Canceling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix |
6829 |
`a' forces normal posting method. |
6830 |
|
6831 |
*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text |
6832 |
-- `W d'. |
6833 |
|
6834 |
*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands' |
6835 |
to a non-nil value. |
6836 |
|
6837 |
*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling |
6838 |
where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers. |
6839 |
|
6840 |
*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer |
6841 |
has been added. |
6842 |
|
6843 |
*** A history of where mails have been split is available. |
6844 |
|
6845 |
*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'. |
6846 |
|
6847 |
*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting |
6848 |
`gnus-score-thread-simplify'. |
6849 |
|
6850 |
*** A new function for citing in Message has been added -- |
6851 |
`message-cite-original-without-signature'. |
6852 |
|
6853 |
*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command. |
6854 |
|
6855 |
*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has |
6856 |
been added. |
6857 |
|
6858 |
*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the |
6859 |
`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable. |
6860 |
|
6861 |
*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually |
6862 |
updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command. |
6863 |
|
6864 |
*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend. |
6865 |
|
6866 |
*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb. |
6867 |
|
6868 |
*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated. |
6869 |
|
6870 |
** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode |
6871 |
|
6872 |
*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give |
6873 |
options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in |
6874 |
nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "". |
6875 |
|
6876 |
*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a |
6877 |
TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some |
6878 |
of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run |
6879 |
TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you |
6880 |
can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET. |
6881 |
|
6882 |
*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'. |
6883 |
All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available |
6884 |
but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use |
6885 |
the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell. |
6886 |
|
6887 |
*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check |
6888 |
the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur* |
6889 |
buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular |
6890 |
mismatch. |
6891 |
|
6892 |
** Changes to RefTeX mode |
6893 |
|
6894 |
*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and |
6895 |
file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys. |
6896 |
|
6897 |
*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now |
6898 |
lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1 |
6899 |
characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be |
6900 |
removed from the label. |
6901 |
|
6902 |
*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use |
6903 |
a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'. |
6904 |
|
6905 |
*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the |
6906 |
customization group `reftex-finding-files'. |
6907 |
|
6908 |
*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to |
6909 |
`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular |
6910 |
expressions. |
6911 |
|
6912 |
*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers. |
6913 |
|
6914 |
** New/deleted modes and packages |
6915 |
|
6916 |
*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and |
6917 |
SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'. |
6918 |
|
6919 |
*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for |
6920 |
editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with |
6921 |
SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'. |
6922 |
|
6923 |
*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer |
6924 |
changes with a special face. |
6925 |
|
6926 |
*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and |
6927 |
this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use |
6928 |
Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el. |
6929 |
|
6930 |
* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4 |
6931 |
|
6932 |
** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better. |
6933 |
This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets, |
6934 |
conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters, |
6935 |
and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details, |
6936 |
check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual. |
6937 |
|
6938 |
The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds |
6939 |
Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim |
6940 |
distribution when the config.bat script is run. |
6941 |
|
6942 |
** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on |
6943 |
MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it |
6944 |
controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written |
6945 |
directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of |
6946 |
Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing |
6947 |
on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a |
6948 |
string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external |
6949 |
program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of |
6950 |
printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.) |
6951 |
|
6952 |
** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript |
6953 |
output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs |
6954 |
available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard |
6955 |
input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a |
6956 |
temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external |
6957 |
program. |
6958 |
|
6959 |
An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT, |
6960 |
and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these |
6961 |
programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax |
6962 |
automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name |
6963 |
as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is |
6964 |
ignored, as both programs have no useful switches. |
6965 |
|
6966 |
** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has |
6967 |
a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on |
6968 |
MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but |
6969 |
was not documented clearly before. |
6970 |
|
6971 |
** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals. |
6972 |
This includes Tetris and Snake. |
6973 |
|
6974 |
* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4 |
6975 |
|
6976 |
** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position |
6977 |
return the position of the beginning or end of the current line. |
6978 |
They both accept an optional argument, which has the same |
6979 |
meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line. |
6980 |
|
6981 |
** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument |
6982 |
WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing, |
6983 |
and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern. |
6984 |
|
6985 |
** Changes in the file-attributes function. |
6986 |
|
6987 |
*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float. |
6988 |
It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise. |
6989 |
|
6990 |
*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if |
6991 |
the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two |
6992 |
integers. |
6993 |
|
6994 |
** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of |
6995 |
files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same |
6996 |
arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that |
6997 |
file names and attributes are returned. |
6998 |
|
6999 |
** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for |
7000 |
sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It |
7001 |
accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its attributes. |
7002 |
It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and |
7003 |
returns the result. |
7004 |
|
7005 |
** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern |
7006 |
to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern. |
7007 |
|
7008 |
** New functions for base64 conversion: |
7009 |
|
7010 |
The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer |
7011 |
into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region |
7012 |
performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported |
7013 |
optionally. |
7014 |
|
7015 |
Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar |
7016 |
job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string. |
7017 |
|
7018 |
** |
7019 |
The new function process-running-child-p |
7020 |
will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its |
7021 |
terminal to its own child process. |
7022 |
|
7023 |
** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature: |
7024 |
when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal |
7025 |
to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell |
7026 |
itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent. |
7027 |
|
7028 |
** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can |
7029 |
be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists. |
7030 |
|
7031 |
** easymenu.el now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'. |
7032 |
:included is an alias for :visible. |
7033 |
|
7034 |
easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by |
7035 |
easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used |
7036 |
to move or copy menu entries. |
7037 |
|
7038 |
** Multibyte editing changes |
7039 |
|
7040 |
*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is |
7041 |
an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to |
7042 |
make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also |
7043 |
work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and |
7044 |
char-bytes in a loop typically as below: |
7045 |
(setq char (sref str idx) |
7046 |
idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx))) |
7047 |
The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete. |
7048 |
|
7049 |
If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character |
7050 |
(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code: |
7051 |
(charset-bytes (char-charset ch)) |
7052 |
|
7053 |
*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the |
7054 |
region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or |
7055 |
deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error: |
7056 |
|
7057 |
Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibited |
7058 |
|
7059 |
This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character |
7060 |
across the boundary. |
7061 |
|
7062 |
*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include |
7063 |
`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases: |
7064 |
o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and |
7065 |
contains 8-bit characters. |
7066 |
o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and |
7067 |
contains invalid characters. |
7068 |
|
7069 |
*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove |
7070 |
text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly |
7071 |
preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing |
7072 |
text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct |
7073 |
way. |
7074 |
|
7075 |
*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems. |
7076 |
If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of |
7077 |
end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by |
7078 |
prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line. |
7079 |
|
7080 |
*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly |
7081 |
compose Thai characters in a string. |
7082 |
|
7083 |
** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third |
7084 |
argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name |
7085 |
for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as |
7086 |
menus should always use the third argument. |
7087 |
|
7088 |
** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char, |
7089 |
read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second |
7090 |
arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current |
7091 |
input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil. |
7092 |
|
7093 |
** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents |
7094 |
of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in |
7095 |
programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing |
7096 |
inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases. |
7097 |
|
7098 |
** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in |
7099 |
the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it |
7100 |
returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous |
7101 |
echo area contents. |
7102 |
|
7103 |
(with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY) |
7104 |
|
7105 |
** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument |
7106 |
NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the |
7107 |
requested feature cannot be loaded. |
7108 |
|
7109 |
** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the |
7110 |
foreground color, background color or stipple pattern |
7111 |
means to clear out that attribute. |
7112 |
|
7113 |
** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame |
7114 |
gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame. |
7115 |
|
7116 |
** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now |
7117 |
read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode |
7118 |
unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the |
7119 |
end of with-output-to-temp-buffer. |
7120 |
|
7121 |
** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on |
7122 |
the gap of the current buffer. |
7123 |
|
7124 |
** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way |
7125 |
to convert between character positions and byte positions in the |
7126 |
current buffer. |
7127 |
|
7128 |
** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to |
7129 |
facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs. |
7130 |
These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check |
7131 |
it back in after any modifications have been made. |
7132 |
|
7133 |
* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3 |
7134 |
|
7135 |
** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of |
7136 |
the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and |
7137 |
/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those |
7138 |
directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and |
7139 |
subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path. |
7140 |
|
7141 |
Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose |
7142 |
names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded. |
7143 |
Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory |
7144 |
which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use |
7145 |
these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched. |
7146 |
|
7147 |
Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it |
7148 |
starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each |
7149 |
time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower. |
7150 |
|
7151 |
This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs |
7152 |
Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically |
7153 |
to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the |
7154 |
subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a |
7155 |
`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired |
7156 |
results. |
7157 |
|
7158 |
** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from |
7159 |
GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers |
7160 |
that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in |
7161 |
fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago. |
7162 |
|
7163 |
* Changes in Emacs 20.3 |
7164 |
|
7165 |
** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command |
7166 |
including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward, |
7167 |
it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can |
7168 |
perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition. |
7169 |
|
7170 |
** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a |
7171 |
specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired |
7172 |
region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing |
7173 |
further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo |
7174 |
command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made |
7175 |
within the region you originally specified, until either all of them |
7176 |
are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that |
7177 |
region. |
7178 |
|
7179 |
In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests |
7180 |
selective undo. |
7181 |
|
7182 |
** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are |
7183 |
unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte |
7184 |
buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same |
7185 |
effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs |
7186 |
Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode. |
7187 |
|
7188 |
The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files, |
7189 |
though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use |
7190 |
-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to |
7191 |
load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started. |
7192 |
|
7193 |
** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and |
7194 |
no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the |
7195 |
enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is |
7196 |
something that most users not do. |
7197 |
|
7198 |
** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste |
7199 |
operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X. |
7200 |
The coding system can make a difference for communication with other |
7201 |
applications. |
7202 |
|
7203 |
C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and |
7204 |
pasting operations. |
7205 |
|
7206 |
** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by |
7207 |
setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks |
7208 |
like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different |
7209 |
printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting |
7210 |
`ps-printer-name'. |
7211 |
|
7212 |
** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a |
7213 |
minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember |
7214 |
any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it |
7215 |
except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting |
7216 |
incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor |
7217 |
hits a new word. |
7218 |
|
7219 |
Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for |
7220 |
Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not |
7221 |
to be confused by TeX commands. |
7222 |
|
7223 |
You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something |
7224 |
correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by |
7225 |
clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu |
7226 |
of various alternative replacements and actions. |
7227 |
|
7228 |
Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces |
7229 |
the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several |
7230 |
corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in |
7231 |
alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if |
7232 |
flyspell-sort-corrections is nil. |
7233 |
|
7234 |
Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if |
7235 |
flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil. |
7236 |
|
7237 |
** Changes in input method usage. |
7238 |
|
7239 |
Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among |
7240 |
the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p |
7241 |
respectively. |
7242 |
|
7243 |
You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion. |
7244 |
|
7245 |
If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one |
7246 |
of the alternatives with Mouse-2. |
7247 |
|
7248 |
The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so |
7249 |
that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'. |
7250 |
|
7251 |
If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given. |
7252 |
|
7253 |
If the value is t, extra guidance is always given. |
7254 |
|
7255 |
If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only |
7256 |
when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py. |
7257 |
|
7258 |
If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is |
7259 |
given in the following case: |
7260 |
o When you are using a complex input method. |
7261 |
o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer. |
7262 |
|
7263 |
If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting |
7264 |
input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice, |
7265 |
and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with, |
7266 |
setting it to t is helpful. |
7267 |
|
7268 |
The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method. |
7269 |
|
7270 |
In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following |
7271 |
keys: |
7272 |
Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method |
7273 |
C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc |
7274 |
F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja |
7275 |
These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language |
7276 |
environment. |
7277 |
|
7278 |
** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file |
7279 |
names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the |
7280 |
minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to |
7281 |
get |
7282 |
|
7283 |
/usr/foo//etc/passwd |
7284 |
|
7285 |
which stands for the file /etc/passwd. |
7286 |
|
7287 |
Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list. |
7288 |
Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list. |
7289 |
|
7290 |
** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t |
7291 |
at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve |
7292 |
its owner and group. |
7293 |
|
7294 |
** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs |
7295 |
Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries. |
7296 |
|
7297 |
** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle |
7298 |
contents before inserting the specified string on each line. |
7299 |
|
7300 |
** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle |
7301 |
which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column |
7302 |
in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified |
7303 |
by the left edge of the rectangle. |
7304 |
|
7305 |
** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG, |
7306 |
increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit |
7307 |
C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful |
7308 |
for writing keyboard macros. |
7309 |
|
7310 |
** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories, |
7311 |
files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The |
7312 |
frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as |
7313 |
the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define |
7314 |
additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and |
7315 |
info. |
7316 |
|
7317 |
** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%. |
7318 |
|
7319 |
** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x |
7320 |
query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region |
7321 |
contents only. |
7322 |
|
7323 |
** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for |
7324 |
confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call |
7325 |
the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM |
7326 |
says whether to ask for confirmation in this case. |
7327 |
|
7328 |
** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited |
7329 |
non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file |
7330 |
literally. If you say no, it signals an error. |
7331 |
|
7332 |
** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature |
7333 |
now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook. |
7334 |
Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is |
7335 |
inconsistent with Emacs conventions. |
7336 |
|
7337 |
** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or |
7338 |
failure if the command produces no output. |
7339 |
|
7340 |
** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window |
7341 |
manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move |
7342 |
the mouse. |
7343 |
|
7344 |
** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to |
7345 |
mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related |
7346 |
function and variable names. |
7347 |
|
7348 |
** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for |
7349 |
reading specific files. This has higher priority than |
7350 |
file-coding-system-alist. |
7351 |
|
7352 |
** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to |
7353 |
t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by |
7354 |
converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to |
7355 |
the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed |
7356 |
according to the current fontset. |
7357 |
|
7358 |
** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed. |
7359 |
|
7360 |
The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of |
7361 |
that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and |
7362 |
nonascii-insert-offset. |
7363 |
|
7364 |
For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if |
7365 |
enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table |
7366 |
nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte |
7367 |
characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters. |
7368 |
|
7369 |
** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get |
7370 |
an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning. |
7371 |
|
7372 |
** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case |
7373 |
letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search. |
7374 |
|
7375 |
** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables |
7376 |
are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant |
7377 |
command keys. |
7378 |
|
7379 |
** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for |
7380 |
user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions. |
7381 |
|
7382 |
Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for |
7383 |
user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at |
7384 |
all variables that have documentation. |
7385 |
|
7386 |
** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer |
7387 |
shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way |
7388 |
that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable |
7389 |
minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap |
7390 |
it should show; the default is 20. |
7391 |
|
7392 |
Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode, |
7393 |
the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole |
7394 |
of your input. |
7395 |
|
7396 |
** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize |
7397 |
all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in |
7398 |
recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as |
7399 |
argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all |
7400 |
the customizable options which were changed since that version. |
7401 |
Newly added options are included as well. |
7402 |
|
7403 |
If you don't specify a particular version number argument, |
7404 |
then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options |
7405 |
for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded. |
7406 |
|
7407 |
This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the |
7408 |
Customize menu. |
7409 |
|
7410 |
** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out |
7411 |
the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command. |
7412 |
|
7413 |
** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of |
7414 |
buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were |
7415 |
invoked. |
7416 |
|
7417 |
** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces |
7418 |
that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment. |
7419 |
The default is 1. |
7420 |
|
7421 |
** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol |
7422 |
syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has |
7423 |
new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram |
7424 |
(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block |
7425 |
sensibly. |
7426 |
|
7427 |
** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger. |
7428 |
|
7429 |
** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil |
7430 |
value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make |
7431 |
two entries in one day for one file, and combine them. |
7432 |
|
7433 |
** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a |
7434 |
reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string |
7435 |
for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically |
7436 |
every night. |
7437 |
|
7438 |
** Desktop changes |
7439 |
|
7440 |
*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set |
7441 |
the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom. |
7442 |
|
7443 |
*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored |
7444 |
and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'. |
7445 |
|
7446 |
** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to |
7447 |
read and post multi-lingual articles. |
7448 |
|
7449 |
** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when |
7450 |
doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should |
7451 |
be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden |
7452 |
outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and |
7453 |
the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is |
7454 |
made invisible again. |
7455 |
|
7456 |
** Mail reading and sending changes |
7457 |
|
7458 |
*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of |
7459 |
the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any |
7460 |
changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently |
7461 |
toggle. |
7462 |
|
7463 |
*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file, |
7464 |
now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the |
7465 |
summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if |
7466 |
the message has no subject, is stored in the variable |
7467 |
rmail-default-body-file. |
7468 |
|
7469 |
*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no |
7470 |
longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they |
7471 |
handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use. |
7472 |
|
7473 |
*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string, |
7474 |
it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression |
7475 |
is evaluated to insert the signature. |
7476 |
|
7477 |
*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of |
7478 |
outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email |
7479 |
handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for |
7480 |
putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for |
7481 |
transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be |
7482 |
especially interested in trying feedmail. |
7483 |
|
7484 |
feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of |
7485 |
feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features |
7486 |
provided by feedmail are: |
7487 |
|
7488 |
**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and |
7489 |
stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users); |
7490 |
there is also a queue for draft messages |
7491 |
|
7492 |
**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and |
7493 |
be prompted for confirmation |
7494 |
|
7495 |
**** does smart filling of address headers |
7496 |
|
7497 |
**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be |
7498 |
the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this |
7499 |
can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get |
7500 |
|
7501 |
**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting |
7502 |
the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail, |
7503 |
/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new |
7504 |
function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp) |
7505 |
|
7506 |
** Dired changes |
7507 |
|
7508 |
*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked |
7509 |
files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T". |
7510 |
|
7511 |
*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily |
7512 |
run Dired on the directory name at point. |
7513 |
|
7514 |
*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of |
7515 |
files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match |
7516 |
for a specified regexp. |
7517 |
|
7518 |
** VC Changes |
7519 |
|
7520 |
*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control |
7521 |
conveniently. |
7522 |
|
7523 |
*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much |
7524 |
faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary |
7525 |
Dired. |
7526 |
|
7527 |
VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the |
7528 |
directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive |
7529 |
listing of all files at or below the given directory which are |
7530 |
currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown). |
7531 |
|
7532 |
You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil, |
7533 |
then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set |
7534 |
vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version |
7535 |
control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i' |
7536 |
on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired. |
7537 |
|
7538 |
All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which |
7539 |
is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type |
7540 |
`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on |
7541 |
the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes |
7542 |
`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked. |
7543 |
|
7544 |
The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to |
7545 |
toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all |
7546 |
VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command, |
7547 |
`* l', to mark all files currently locked. |
7548 |
|
7549 |
Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in |
7550 |
ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls |
7551 |
command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output. |
7552 |
|
7553 |
*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working |
7554 |
file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff |
7555 |
session to resolve them. |
7556 |
|
7557 |
Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to |
7558 |
resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that |
7559 |
contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS |
7560 |
uses as well). |
7561 |
|
7562 |
*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new |
7563 |
command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When |
7564 |
you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify |
7565 |
either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that |
7566 |
branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file. |
7567 |
If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively, |
7568 |
using ediff. |
7569 |
|
7570 |
** Changes in Font Lock |
7571 |
|
7572 |
*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face |
7573 |
are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical |
7574 |
use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are |
7575 |
unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for |
7576 |
compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face. |
7577 |
|
7578 |
** Frame name display changes |
7579 |
|
7580 |
*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current |
7581 |
frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and |
7582 |
raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or |
7583 |
when many frames are invisible or iconified. |
7584 |
|
7585 |
*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the |
7586 |
frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames |
7587 |
menu. |
7588 |
|
7589 |
** Comint (subshell) changes |
7590 |
|
7591 |
*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a |
7592 |
subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility |
7593 |
with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this. |
7594 |
|
7595 |
*** There are new commands in Comint mode. |
7596 |
|
7597 |
C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history; |
7598 |
that is, the line after the last line you got. |
7599 |
You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one. |
7600 |
|
7601 |
C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to |
7602 |
send the current line together with the following line, when you send |
7603 |
the following line. |
7604 |
|
7605 |
C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark, |
7606 |
which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the |
7607 |
previously sent input. |
7608 |
|
7609 |
C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input; |
7610 |
it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input |
7611 |
as the search string. |
7612 |
|
7613 |
*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll |
7614 |
automatically in compilation-mode windows. |
7615 |
|
7616 |
** C mode changes |
7617 |
|
7618 |
*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation, |
7619 |
and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is |
7620 |
assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro |
7621 |
definition. |
7622 |
|
7623 |
*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified |
7624 |
(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations. |
7625 |
Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu" |
7626 |
style is still the default however. |
7627 |
|
7628 |
*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style. |
7629 |
|
7630 |
*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which |
7631 |
are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer |
7632 |
them. They do not have key bindings by default. |
7633 |
|
7634 |
*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement) |
7635 |
and M-e (c-end-of-statement). |
7636 |
|
7637 |
*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols |
7638 |
namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace. |
7639 |
|
7640 |
*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets |
7641 |
makes the style variables local to that buffer only. |
7642 |
|
7643 |
*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren, |
7644 |
c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change. |
7645 |
|
7646 |
*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You |
7647 |
should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire |
7648 |
package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new |
7649 |
variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default. |
7650 |
|
7651 |
** Changes to hippie-expand. |
7652 |
|
7653 |
*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If |
7654 |
non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for, |
7655 |
which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'. |
7656 |
|
7657 |
*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If |
7658 |
non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when |
7659 |
expanding dynamically. |
7660 |
|
7661 |
*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If |
7662 |
non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched. |
7663 |
|
7664 |
*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If |
7665 |
non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in |
7666 |
this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose |
7667 |
expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'. |
7668 |
|
7669 |
*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied. |
7670 |
|
7671 |
** Changes in BibTeX mode. |
7672 |
|
7673 |
*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable |
7674 |
bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during |
7675 |
automatic key generation. This replaces variable |
7676 |
bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches |
7677 |
against the first word in the title. |
7678 |
|
7679 |
*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just |
7680 |
capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations, |
7681 |
bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with |
7682 |
lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use |
7683 |
lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the |
7684 |
bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting. |
7685 |
|
7686 |
*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key |
7687 |
generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is |
7688 |
replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and |
7689 |
bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert. |
7690 |
|
7691 |
** Changes in vcursor.el. |
7692 |
|
7693 |
*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap |
7694 |
and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A |
7695 |
variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be |
7696 |
entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including |
7697 |
`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency |
7698 |
in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps. |
7699 |
|
7700 |
*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the |
7701 |
Editing group once the package is loaded. |
7702 |
|
7703 |
*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is |
7704 |
generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set |
7705 |
vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behavior. |
7706 |
|
7707 |
*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the |
7708 |
vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command. |
7709 |
|
7710 |
** Ispell changes. |
7711 |
|
7712 |
*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current |
7713 |
buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings |
7714 |
are identified by syntax tables in effect. |
7715 |
|
7716 |
*** Generic region skipping implemented. |
7717 |
A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will |
7718 |
and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user |
7719 |
defined. New applications and improvements made available by this |
7720 |
include: |
7721 |
|
7722 |
o URLs are automatically skipped |
7723 |
o EMail message checking is vastly improved. |
7724 |
|
7725 |
*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals. |
7726 |
|
7727 |
** Changes to RefTeX mode |
7728 |
|
7729 |
RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very |
7730 |
large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been |
7731 |
re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the |
7732 |
section `Optimizations' in the manual. |
7733 |
|
7734 |
*** New recursive parser. |
7735 |
|
7736 |
The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the |
7737 |
entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new |
7738 |
recursive parser scans the individual files. |
7739 |
|
7740 |
*** Parsing only part of a document. |
7741 |
|
7742 |
Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling |
7743 |
partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of |
7744 |
the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t. |
7745 |
|
7746 |
(setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t) |
7747 |
|
7748 |
*** Storing parsing information in a file. |
7749 |
|
7750 |
This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use |
7751 |
|
7752 |
(setq reftex-save-parse-info t) |
7753 |
|
7754 |
*** Using multiple selection buffers |
7755 |
|
7756 |
If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens |
7757 |
for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting |
7758 |
|
7759 |
(setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) |
7760 |
|
7761 |
*** References to external documents. |
7762 |
|
7763 |
The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external |
7764 |
documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external |
7765 |
documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument |
7766 |
macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with |
7767 |
RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in |
7768 |
the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )'). |
7769 |
The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer. |
7770 |
|
7771 |
*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default. |
7772 |
|
7773 |
The built-in command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands, |
7774 |
and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution. |
7775 |
|
7776 |
Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes |
7777 |
the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly. |
7778 |
|
7779 |
*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers |
7780 |
|
7781 |
The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc* |
7782 |
buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'. |
7783 |
|
7784 |
*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes. |
7785 |
|
7786 |
The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of |
7787 |
contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map', |
7788 |
`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes |
7789 |
have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you |
7790 |
enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?' |
7791 |
at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out |
7792 |
more. |
7793 |
|
7794 |
*** Support for the varioref package |
7795 |
|
7796 |
The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref. |
7797 |
|
7798 |
*** New hooks |
7799 |
|
7800 |
Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references, |
7801 |
and citations are created. These hooks are |
7802 |
`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function', |
7803 |
`reftex-format-cite-function'. |
7804 |
|
7805 |
*** Citations outside LaTeX |
7806 |
|
7807 |
The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in |
7808 |
a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details. |
7809 |
|
7810 |
*** Short context is no longer fontified. |
7811 |
|
7812 |
The short context in the label menu no longer copies the |
7813 |
fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be |
7814 |
fontified, use |
7815 |
|
7816 |
(setq reftex-refontify-context t) |
7817 |
|
7818 |
** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument. |
7819 |
With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of |
7820 |
the file name within its directory; it only checks for other |
7821 |
directories that contain the same file name. |
7822 |
|
7823 |
Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file |
7824 |
Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary |
7825 |
file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to |
7826 |
Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that |
7827 |
have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer |
7828 |
names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other |
7829 |
directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present |
7830 |
directory. |
7831 |
|
7832 |
** New modes and packages |
7833 |
|
7834 |
*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode. |
7835 |
It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer |
7836 |
it, but some do not. |
7837 |
|
7838 |
*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL |
7839 |
code. |
7840 |
|
7841 |
*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the |
7842 |
current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move |
7843 |
around in a buffer. |
7844 |
|
7845 |
Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu. |
7846 |
|
7847 |
*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author |
7848 |
uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should |
7849 |
be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an |
7850 |
established system of notation similar to Chess. |
7851 |
|
7852 |
*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp |
7853 |
documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style |
7854 |
guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual. |
7855 |
|
7856 |
*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features |
7857 |
available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around |
7858 |
system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of |
7859 |
simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also |
7860 |
functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and |
7861 |
the like. |
7862 |
|
7863 |
*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to |
7864 |
identify recently changed parts of the buffer text. |
7865 |
|
7866 |
*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done |
7867 |
within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not |
7868 |
used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize |
7869 |
the user option `midnight-mode' to t. |
7870 |
|
7871 |
*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes. |
7872 |
|
7873 |
apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files |
7874 |
samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files |
7875 |
fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files |
7876 |
x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files |
7877 |
hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc) |
7878 |
mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files |
7879 |
javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files |
7880 |
vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files |
7881 |
java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files |
7882 |
java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files |
7883 |
mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files |
7884 |
|
7885 |
Platform-specific modes: |
7886 |
|
7887 |
prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files |
7888 |
pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files |
7889 |
alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files |
7890 |
inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files |
7891 |
ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files |
7892 |
reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files |
7893 |
bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts |
7894 |
rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files |
7895 |
rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts |
7896 |
|
7897 |
* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published |
7898 |
|
7899 |
** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, |
7900 |
use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. |
7901 |
That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode. |
7902 |
Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode. |
7903 |
|
7904 |
Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether |
7905 |
you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives |
7906 |
consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started. |
7907 |
|
7908 |
** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist, |
7909 |
and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can |
7910 |
specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for |
7911 |
searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions. |
7912 |
|
7913 |
** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and |
7914 |
multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte |
7915 |
character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language |
7916 |
environment. |
7917 |
|
7918 |
** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now |
7919 |
take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt |
7920 |
string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the |
7921 |
current input method for reading this one event. |
7922 |
|
7923 |
** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte |
7924 |
now control whether to output certain characters as |
7925 |
backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte |
7926 |
non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte |
7927 |
characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing |
7928 |
in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not). |
7929 |
|
7930 |
* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published |
7931 |
|
7932 |
** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version |
7933 |
of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3. |
7934 |
|
7935 |
** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were |
7936 |
in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1) |
7937 |
always increases point by 1. |
7938 |
|
7939 |
The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is |
7940 |
considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted. |
7941 |
|
7942 |
See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters. |
7943 |
|
7944 |
** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'. |
7945 |
Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's |
7946 |
default value changed. For example, |
7947 |
|
7948 |
(defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed." |
7949 |
:type 'integer |
7950 |
:group 'foo |
7951 |
:version "20.3") |
7952 |
|
7953 |
(defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group." |
7954 |
:version "20.3") |
7955 |
|
7956 |
If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the |
7957 |
default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It |
7958 |
is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a |
7959 |
`:version' in the top level group. |
7960 |
|
7961 |
This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command. |
7962 |
|
7963 |
** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name |
7964 |
starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray. |
7965 |
|
7966 |
However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that |
7967 |
symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that |
7968 |
support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables |
7969 |
to themselves. |
7970 |
|
7971 |
If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil, |
7972 |
this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any |
7973 |
values whatever. |
7974 |
|
7975 |
** There is a new debugger command, R. |
7976 |
It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result |
7977 |
in the buffer *Debugger-record*. |
7978 |
|
7979 |
** Frame-local variables. |
7980 |
|
7981 |
You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call |
7982 |
the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have |
7983 |
local bindings for that variable. |
7984 |
|
7985 |
These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a |
7986 |
frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling |
7987 |
modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the |
7988 |
parameter name. |
7989 |
|
7990 |
Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings. |
7991 |
Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is |
7992 |
active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding, |
7993 |
that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active. |
7994 |
|
7995 |
It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not |
7996 |
clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a |
7997 |
very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect |
7998 |
through a window-local binding would not be very robust. |
7999 |
|
8000 |
** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing |
8001 |
"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when |
8002 |
evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form |
8003 |
makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns. |
8004 |
See the documentation in sregex.el. |
8005 |
|
8006 |
** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which |
8007 |
is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to |
8008 |
parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended. |
8009 |
The contents of this field are not yet finalized. |
8010 |
|
8011 |
** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION. |
8012 |
If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'. |
8013 |
|
8014 |
** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from |
8015 |
known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can |
8016 |
define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead. |
8017 |
|
8018 |
** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE |
8019 |
when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as |
8020 |
it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the |
8021 |
history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default. |
8022 |
|
8023 |
The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to |
8024 |
return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters |
8025 |
empty input. |
8026 |
|
8027 |
** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use |
8028 |
for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to |
8029 |
`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names. |
8030 |
Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as |
8031 |
`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string. |
8032 |
|
8033 |
** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal, |
8034 |
echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments: |
8035 |
a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a |
8036 |
default password to use if the user enters nothing. |
8037 |
|
8038 |
** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to |
8039 |
specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a |
8040 |
function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the |
8041 |
place where a break is being considered. If the function returns |
8042 |
non-nil, then the line won't be broken there. |
8043 |
|
8044 |
** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE. |
8045 |
If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate |
8046 |
up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the |
8047 |
end of the window, even if this requires computation. |
8048 |
|
8049 |
** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME |
8050 |
which specifies which frame's buffer list to use. |
8051 |
If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list. |
8052 |
|
8053 |
** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer, |
8054 |
holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window |
8055 |
was directed to display this buffer. |
8056 |
|
8057 |
** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects |
8058 |
with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they |
8059 |
describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in |
8060 |
other words, if they would give the same results if passed to |
8061 |
set-window-configuration. |
8062 |
|
8063 |
** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two |
8064 |
window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer |
8065 |
positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of |
8066 |
windows and the choice of buffers to display. |
8067 |
|
8068 |
** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to |
8069 |
override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist |
8070 |
look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP). |
8071 |
|
8072 |
If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a |
8073 |
non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the |
8074 |
map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist. |
8075 |
|
8076 |
minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers, |
8077 |
and it is meant to be set by major modes. |
8078 |
|
8079 |
** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string |
8080 |
except that it discards all text properties from the result. |
8081 |
|
8082 |
** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument |
8083 |
USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as |
8084 |
floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100. |
8085 |
|
8086 |
** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory |
8087 |
to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined |
8088 |
in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems |
8089 |
it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables. |
8090 |
|
8091 |
** Menu changes |
8092 |
|
8093 |
*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the |
8094 |
keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now |
8095 |
better supported. |
8096 |
|
8097 |
The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls |
8098 |
a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when |
8099 |
you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you |
8100 |
can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature; |
8101 |
then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar. |
8102 |
|
8103 |
*** A new format for menu items is supported. |
8104 |
|
8105 |
In a keymap, a key binding that has the format |
8106 |
(STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING) |
8107 |
defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that |
8108 |
starts with the symbol `menu-item'. |
8109 |
|
8110 |
The format is: |
8111 |
(menu-item ITEM-NAME) or |
8112 |
(menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST) |
8113 |
where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item |
8114 |
string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list. |
8115 |
The supported properties include |
8116 |
|
8117 |
:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the |
8118 |
item is enabled. |
8119 |
:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the |
8120 |
item should appear in the menu. |
8121 |
:filter FILTER-FN |
8122 |
FILTER-FN is a function of one argument, |
8123 |
which will be REAL-BINDING. |
8124 |
It should return a binding to use instead. |
8125 |
:keys DESCRIPTION |
8126 |
DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard |
8127 |
binding for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with |
8128 |
`substitute-command-keys' before it is used. |
8129 |
:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE |
8130 |
KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent |
8131 |
keyboard binding. |
8132 |
:key-sequence nil |
8133 |
This means that the command normally has no |
8134 |
keyboard equivalent. |
8135 |
:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used). |
8136 |
:button (TYPE . SELECTED) |
8137 |
TYPE is :toggle or :radio. |
8138 |
SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its |
8139 |
value says whether this button is currently selected. |
8140 |
|
8141 |
Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu. |
8142 |
Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported. |
8143 |
|
8144 |
(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item. |
8145 |
|
8146 |
** New event types |
8147 |
|
8148 |
*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a |
8149 |
mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that |
8150 |
corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated, |
8151 |
which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is: |
8152 |
|
8153 |
(mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA) |
8154 |
|
8155 |
where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the |
8156 |
same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number |
8157 |
indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A |
8158 |
negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards |
8159 |
the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated |
8160 |
forward, away from the user. |
8161 |
|
8162 |
As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. |
8163 |
|
8164 |
*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of |
8165 |
files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged |
8166 |
and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of |
8167 |
filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically |
8168 |
loaded into Emacs. The format is: |
8169 |
|
8170 |
(drag-n-drop POSITION FILES) |
8171 |
|
8172 |
where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the |
8173 |
same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames |
8174 |
that were dragged and dropped. |
8175 |
|
8176 |
As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. |
8177 |
|
8178 |
** Changes relating to multibyte characters. |
8179 |
|
8180 |
*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only; |
8181 |
any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way |
8182 |
to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte. |
8183 |
|
8184 |
*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You |
8185 |
can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character |
8186 |
that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape. |
8187 |
|
8188 |
*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were |
8189 |
in Emacs 19 and before. |
8190 |
|
8191 |
The function chars-in-string has been deleted. |
8192 |
The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'. |
8193 |
|
8194 |
*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current |
8195 |
buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or |
8196 |
unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte |
8197 |
representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation. |
8198 |
|
8199 |
This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed |
8200 |
as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents |
8201 |
viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as |
8202 |
one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation |
8203 |
will count as two characters using unibyte representation. |
8204 |
|
8205 |
This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which |
8206 |
representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer |
8207 |
(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are |
8208 |
consistent with the new representation. |
8209 |
|
8210 |
*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte |
8211 |
representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care |
8212 |
about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary; |
8213 |
however, it makes a difference when you compare strings. |
8214 |
|
8215 |
The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of |
8216 |
nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them |
8217 |
using the table nonascii-translation-table. |
8218 |
|
8219 |
*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte |
8220 |
representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the |
8221 |
representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings. |
8222 |
|
8223 |
The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation |
8224 |
loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically |
8225 |
is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer. |
8226 |
|
8227 |
*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string |
8228 |
which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte. |
8229 |
|
8230 |
*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string |
8231 |
which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte. |
8232 |
|
8233 |
*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare |
8234 |
portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte, |
8235 |
so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string. |
8236 |
You can specify whether to ignore case or not. |
8237 |
|
8238 |
*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that |
8239 |
it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal. |
8240 |
|
8241 |
*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now |
8242 |
convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the |
8243 |
buffer or string being searched. |
8244 |
|
8245 |
One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of |
8246 |
[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when |
8247 |
searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when |
8248 |
searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no |
8249 |
obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what |
8250 |
you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular |
8251 |
expression [^\0-\177] works for it. |
8252 |
|
8253 |
*** Structure of coding system changed. |
8254 |
|
8255 |
All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named |
8256 |
by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector |
8257 |
which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector |
8258 |
as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this |
8259 |
vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define |
8260 |
your own alias name of a coding system by the function |
8261 |
define-coding-system-alias. |
8262 |
|
8263 |
The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use |
8264 |
the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to |
8265 |
access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion, |
8266 |
pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode, |
8267 |
character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and |
8268 |
safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 |
8269 |
'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter |
8270 |
`iso-8859-1'. |
8271 |
|
8272 |
Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new. |
8273 |
The value of this property is a list of character sets which this |
8274 |
coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance: |
8275 |
(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1) |
8276 |
|
8277 |
Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can |
8278 |
also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they |
8279 |
are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode |
8280 |
the other character sets and read it back correctly. |
8281 |
|
8282 |
*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a |
8283 |
proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string. |
8284 |
This function requires a user interaction. |
8285 |
|
8286 |
*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and |
8287 |
find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by |
8288 |
select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding |
8289 |
systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want |
8290 |
a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of |
8291 |
select-safe-coding-system. |
8292 |
|
8293 |
*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as |
8294 |
decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set |
8295 |
last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding |
8296 |
was done. |
8297 |
|
8298 |
*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be |
8299 |
used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of |
8300 |
coding systems used by some specific language environment. |
8301 |
|
8302 |
*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always |
8303 |
return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII |
8304 |
characters are found, they now return a list of single element |
8305 |
`undecided' or its subsidiaries. |
8306 |
|
8307 |
*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and |
8308 |
coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different |
8309 |
coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is |
8310 |
converted. |
8311 |
|
8312 |
*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a |
8313 |
coding system for communicating with other X clients. |
8314 |
|
8315 |
*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid |
8316 |
character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire |
8317 |
character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words, |
8318 |
each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value |
8319 |
either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a |
8320 |
range of characters. |
8321 |
|
8322 |
*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a |
8323 |
Lisp object is a valid character code or not. |
8324 |
|
8325 |
*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character |
8326 |
in the current buffer at position POS. |
8327 |
|
8328 |
*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable |
8329 |
input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a |
8330 |
function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing |
8331 |
character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the |
8332 |
event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first |
8333 |
binding input-method-function to nil. |
8334 |
|
8335 |
The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input |
8336 |
method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as |
8337 |
input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by |
8338 |
the input method function are not passed to the input method function, |
8339 |
not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits. |
8340 |
|
8341 |
The input method function is not called when reading the second and |
8342 |
subsequent events of a key sequence. |
8343 |
|
8344 |
*** You can customize any language environment by using |
8345 |
set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook. |
8346 |
|
8347 |
The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo |
8348 |
customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For |
8349 |
instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language |
8350 |
environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up |
8351 |
exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding. |
8352 |
|
8353 |
* Changes in Emacs 20.1 |
8354 |
|
8355 |
** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user |
8356 |
options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look |
8357 |
at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a |
8358 |
tree structure. |
8359 |
|
8360 |
M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each |
8361 |
user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values. |
8362 |
|
8363 |
With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs |
8364 |
session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically |
8365 |
in your .emacs file.) |
8366 |
|
8367 |
** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window. |
8368 |
You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode. |
8369 |
|
8370 |
** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'. |
8371 |
This makes more space in the mode line for other information. |
8372 |
|
8373 |
** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted |
8374 |
immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it |
8375 |
kills the region. |
8376 |
|
8377 |
The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they |
8378 |
delete the character before point, as usual. |
8379 |
|
8380 |
** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted |
8381 |
on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature |
8382 |
by setting search-highlight to nil.) |
8383 |
|
8384 |
** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to |
8385 |
insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect, |
8386 |
the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked |
8387 |
onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the |
8388 |
history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the |
8389 |
past.) |
8390 |
|
8391 |
** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs. |
8392 |
This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode |
8393 |
in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode). |
8394 |
TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this |
8395 |
makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs. |
8396 |
|
8397 |
As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode, |
8398 |
and is an alias for it. |
8399 |
|
8400 |
If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph, |
8401 |
use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode. |
8402 |
|
8403 |
** Scrolling changes |
8404 |
|
8405 |
*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen |
8406 |
position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil. |
8407 |
|
8408 |
In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing |
8409 |
on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line |
8410 |
where it started. |
8411 |
|
8412 |
*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you |
8413 |
move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the |
8414 |
screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that |
8415 |
does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines. |
8416 |
|
8417 |
*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the |
8418 |
top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point |
8419 |
comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs |
8420 |
recenters the window. |
8421 |
|
8422 |
** International character set support (MULE) |
8423 |
|
8424 |
Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets, |
8425 |
including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese, |
8426 |
Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese, |
8427 |
Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These |
8428 |
features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as |
8429 |
MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs") |
8430 |
|
8431 |
Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard |
8432 |
coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte |
8433 |
character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide |
8434 |
variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back |
8435 |
into any of these coding systems when saving a file. |
8436 |
|
8437 |
Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used, |
8438 |
generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs |
8439 |
supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or |
8440 |
language, to make it possible to type them. |
8441 |
|
8442 |
The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII |
8443 |
character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377. |
8444 |
|
8445 |
The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain |
8446 |
to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods. |
8447 |
|
8448 |
You can disable multibyte character support as follows: |
8449 |
|
8450 |
(setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil) |
8451 |
|
8452 |
Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte |
8453 |
characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second |
8454 |
argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are |
8455 |
already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte |
8456 |
characters for their work until they want to change. |
8457 |
|
8458 |
*** Input methods |
8459 |
|
8460 |
An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed |
8461 |
specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language |
8462 |
has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use |
8463 |
the same characters can share one input method). Some languages |
8464 |
support several input methods. |
8465 |
|
8466 |
The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into |
8467 |
another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods |
8468 |
work. |
8469 |
|
8470 |
A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of |
8471 |
characters into one letter. Many European input methods use |
8472 |
composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which |
8473 |
consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one |
8474 |
sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single |
8475 |
letter. |
8476 |
|
8477 |
The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed |
8478 |
by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way. |
8479 |
First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone |
8480 |
marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are |
8481 |
mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character". |
8482 |
|
8483 |
None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so |
8484 |
they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using |
8485 |
phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs |
8486 |
converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary. |
8487 |
|
8488 |
Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled |
8489 |
word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use; |
8490 |
typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if |
8491 |
the first guess is wrong. |
8492 |
|
8493 |
*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters) |
8494 |
turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer. |
8495 |
|
8496 |
If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each |
8497 |
byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as |
8498 |
they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for |
8499 |
the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2. |
8500 |
|
8501 |
However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to |
8502 |
use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set |
8503 |
includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can |
8504 |
translate automatically to and from either one. |
8505 |
|
8506 |
*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode. |
8507 |
|
8508 |
Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a |
8509 |
file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte |
8510 |
sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not |
8511 |
what you want. |
8512 |
|
8513 |
If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for |
8514 |
example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding |
8515 |
system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off |
8516 |
multibyte characters in that buffer. |
8517 |
|
8518 |
If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off |
8519 |
character conversion as well. |
8520 |
|
8521 |
*** Displaying international characters on X Windows. |
8522 |
|
8523 |
A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script. |
8524 |
Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports |
8525 |
requires using many fonts. |
8526 |
|
8527 |
Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a |
8528 |
collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes. |
8529 |
|
8530 |
A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by |
8531 |
the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you |
8532 |
have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as |
8533 |
you would use a font. |
8534 |
|
8535 |
If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it |
8536 |
specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot |
8537 |
display that character. It will display an empty box instead. |
8538 |
|
8539 |
The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters |
8540 |
(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII |
8541 |
characters). |
8542 |
|
8543 |
*** Defining fontsets. |
8544 |
|
8545 |
Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still |
8546 |
chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset |
8547 |
with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource. |
8548 |
|
8549 |
Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value |
8550 |
of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is |
8551 |
`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the |
8552 |
standard fontset are created automatically. |
8553 |
|
8554 |
If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn' |
8555 |
argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the |
8556 |
FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name |
8557 |
with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short |
8558 |
name is `fontset-startup'. |
8559 |
|
8560 |
Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2... |
8561 |
The resource value should have this form: |
8562 |
FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]... |
8563 |
FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except: |
8564 |
* most fields should be just the wild card "*". |
8565 |
* the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset" |
8566 |
* the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset. |
8567 |
The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number |
8568 |
of times; each time specifies the font for one character set. |
8569 |
CHARSET-NAME should be the name of a character set, and FONT-NAME |
8570 |
should specify an actual font to use for that character set. |
8571 |
|
8572 |
Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the |
8573 |
last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING. |
8574 |
You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name. |
8575 |
|
8576 |
For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a |
8577 |
font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the |
8578 |
following resource, |
8579 |
Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24 |
8580 |
the font for ASCII is generated as below: |
8581 |
-*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1 |
8582 |
Here is the substitution rule: |
8583 |
Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset |
8584 |
defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has |
8585 |
the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce |
8586 |
sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-. |
8587 |
(This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.) |
8588 |
|
8589 |
The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the |
8590 |
fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call |
8591 |
that function explicitly to create a fontset. |
8592 |
|
8593 |
With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just |
8594 |
like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset |
8595 |
name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the |
8596 |
fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle |
8597 |
fontsets. |
8598 |
|
8599 |
*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs |
8600 |
defaults for a particular choice of language. |
8601 |
|
8602 |
Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input |
8603 |
method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when |
8604 |
visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have |
8605 |
already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The |
8606 |
language environment may also specify a default choice of coding |
8607 |
system for new files that you create. |
8608 |
|
8609 |
It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use |
8610 |
set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the |
8611 |
whole Emacs session. |
8612 |
|
8613 |
For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET |
8614 |
chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this |
8615 |
with (set-language-environment "Latin-1"). |
8616 |
|
8617 |
*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) |
8618 |
specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This |
8619 |
specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving |
8620 |
the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the |
8621 |
coding systems that Emacs supports. |
8622 |
|
8623 |
*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument) |
8624 |
lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file. |
8625 |
This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name. |
8626 |
After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system |
8627 |
is used for *the immediately following command*. |
8628 |
|
8629 |
So if the immediately following command is a command to read or |
8630 |
write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file. |
8631 |
|
8632 |
If the immediately following command does not use the coding system, |
8633 |
then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect. |
8634 |
|
8635 |
For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET |
8636 |
visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1. |
8637 |
|
8638 |
*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*- |
8639 |
construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*- |
8640 |
to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also |
8641 |
specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end |
8642 |
of the file. |
8643 |
|
8644 |
*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies |
8645 |
the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character |
8646 |
code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are |
8647 |
translated into that character code. |
8648 |
|
8649 |
This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in |
8650 |
various countries to support the languages of those countries. |
8651 |
|
8652 |
By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all. |
8653 |
|
8654 |
*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies |
8655 |
the coding system for keyboard input. |
8656 |
|
8657 |
Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals |
8658 |
with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example, |
8659 |
some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it. |
8660 |
|
8661 |
By default, keyboard input is not translated at all. |
8662 |
|
8663 |
Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an |
8664 |
input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that |
8665 |
translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed |
8666 |
to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are |
8667 |
designed to work with terminals. |
8668 |
|
8669 |
*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system) |
8670 |
specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess. |
8671 |
This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess |
8672 |
has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify |
8673 |
translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command |
8674 |
in the corresponding buffer. |
8675 |
|
8676 |
By default, process input and output are not translated at all. |
8677 |
|
8678 |
*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system |
8679 |
to use for encoding file names before operating on them. |
8680 |
It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system. |
8681 |
|
8682 |
*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates |
8683 |
an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the |
8684 |
command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you |
8685 |
want to use. |
8686 |
|
8687 |
C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input |
8688 |
method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method. |
8689 |
|
8690 |
*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard |
8691 |
layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this |
8692 |
remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify |
8693 |
which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout. |
8694 |
|
8695 |
*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays |
8696 |
the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus |
8697 |
related information. |
8698 |
|
8699 |
*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called |
8700 |
HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various |
8701 |
scripts. |
8702 |
|
8703 |
*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays |
8704 |
information about the support for a particular language. |
8705 |
You specify the language as an argument. |
8706 |
|
8707 |
*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies |
8708 |
the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the |
8709 |
first dash. |
8710 |
|
8711 |
A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion |
8712 |
(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion |
8713 |
whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits |
8714 |
1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters: |
8715 |
|
8716 |
A alternativnyj (Russian) |
8717 |
B big5 (Chinese) |
8718 |
C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese) |
8719 |
C iso-2022-cn (Chinese) |
8720 |
D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages) |
8721 |
E euc-japan (Japanese) |
8722 |
I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) |
8723 |
J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese) |
8724 |
K euc-korea (Korean) |
8725 |
R koi8 (Russian) |
8726 |
Q tibetan |
8727 |
S shift_jis (Japanese) |
8728 |
T lao |
8729 |
T tis620 (Thai) |
8730 |
V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese) |
8731 |
i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) |
8732 |
k iso-2022-kr (Korean) |
8733 |
v viqr (Vietnamese) |
8734 |
z hz (Chinese) |
8735 |
|
8736 |
When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system), |
8737 |
two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file |
8738 |
coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for |
8739 |
keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output. |
8740 |
|
8741 |
*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code |
8742 |
conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil. |
8743 |
|
8744 |
When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically |
8745 |
into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with |
8746 |
rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing |
8747 |
Rmail files themselves. |
8748 |
|
8749 |
*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code |
8750 |
conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil. |
8751 |
|
8752 |
Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system |
8753 |
for sending mail: |
8754 |
|
8755 |
- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority. |
8756 |
- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it. |
8757 |
- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used, |
8758 |
if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment. |
8759 |
- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used. |
8760 |
|
8761 |
*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument |
8762 |
to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English, |
8763 |
Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional |
8764 |
translations. |
8765 |
|
8766 |
** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion |
8767 |
of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command |
8768 |
insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer |
8769 |
without any conversion. |
8770 |
|
8771 |
** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed. |
8772 |
You can now specify any number of octal digits. |
8773 |
RET terminates the digits and is discarded; |
8774 |
any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input. |
8775 |
|
8776 |
** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for |
8777 |
functions, variables and file names used in your programs. |
8778 |
|
8779 |
Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point. |
8780 |
Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point. |
8781 |
|
8782 |
Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major |
8783 |
mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used. |
8784 |
|
8785 |
** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command |
8786 |
complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name |
8787 |
in the buffer before point. |
8788 |
|
8789 |
With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of |
8790 |
symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that |
8791 |
you are using. |
8792 |
|
8793 |
With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables, |
8794 |
just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag). |
8795 |
|
8796 |
** File locking works with NFS now. |
8797 |
|
8798 |
The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME, |
8799 |
in the same directory as FILENAME. |
8800 |
|
8801 |
This means that collision detection between two different machines now |
8802 |
works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory |
8803 |
can become a bottleneck. |
8804 |
|
8805 |
The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection |
8806 |
does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot |
8807 |
create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the |
8808 |
file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are |
8809 |
rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is |
8810 |
so useful that the change is worth while. |
8811 |
|
8812 |
When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which |
8813 |
are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious |
8814 |
collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just |
8815 |
tell Emacs to go ahead anyway. |
8816 |
|
8817 |
** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses, |
8818 |
it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call |
8819 |
show-paren-mode. |
8820 |
|
8821 |
** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted |
8822 |
selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load |
8823 |
delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode. |
8824 |
|
8825 |
** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words |
8826 |
within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load |
8827 |
complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode. |
8828 |
|
8829 |
** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you, |
8830 |
it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also |
8831 |
set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values. |
8832 |
|
8833 |
** Changes in View mode. |
8834 |
|
8835 |
*** Several new commands are available in View mode. |
8836 |
Do H in view mode for a list of commands. |
8837 |
|
8838 |
*** There are two new commands for entering View mode: |
8839 |
view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame. |
8840 |
|
8841 |
*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their |
8842 |
previous state. |
8843 |
|
8844 |
*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil, |
8845 |
scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit. |
8846 |
|
8847 |
*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If |
8848 |
non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer, |
8849 |
not just the selected window. |
8850 |
|
8851 |
*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a |
8852 |
read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only |
8853 |
turns View mode on or off. |
8854 |
|
8855 |
*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls |
8856 |
how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil, |
8857 |
delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it. |
8858 |
|
8859 |
** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log, |
8860 |
now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version. |
8861 |
|
8862 |
** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version, |
8863 |
has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is |
8864 |
presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks |
8865 |
which version to compare with. |
8866 |
|
8867 |
** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden |
8868 |
blocks if a match is inside the block. |
8869 |
|
8870 |
The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match |
8871 |
is outside the block. By customizing the variable |
8872 |
isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily |
8873 |
shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search. |
8874 |
|
8875 |
By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind |
8876 |
of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code |
8877 |
blocks, all of them or none. |
8878 |
|
8879 |
** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the |
8880 |
current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for |
8881 |
confirmation first. |
8882 |
|
8883 |
** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name, |
8884 |
now changes the major mode according to that file name. |
8885 |
However, the mode will not be changed if |
8886 |
(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or |
8887 |
(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode, |
8888 |
not suitable for ordinary files, or |
8889 |
(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode. |
8890 |
|
8891 |
This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well. |
8892 |
|
8893 |
However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then |
8894 |
these commands do not change the major mode. |
8895 |
|
8896 |
** M-x occur changes. |
8897 |
|
8898 |
*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters, |
8899 |
it performs a case-sensitive search. |
8900 |
|
8901 |
*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur, |
8902 |
if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search |
8903 |
using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before. |
8904 |
|
8905 |
** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted |
8906 |
in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the |
8907 |
window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in |
8908 |
that window unless you select to another window which shows the same |
8909 |
buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window. |
8910 |
|
8911 |
** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates |
8912 |
after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings |
8913 |
appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents |
8914 |
come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information. |
8915 |
|
8916 |
** Each frame now independently records the order for recently |
8917 |
selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the |
8918 |
buffers recently selected in the selected frame. |
8919 |
|
8920 |
** Outline mode changes. |
8921 |
|
8922 |
*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el). |
8923 |
|
8924 |
*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode. |
8925 |
|
8926 |
** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if |
8927 |
you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer. |
8928 |
Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that |
8929 |
was already active. |
8930 |
|
8931 |
The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not |
8932 |
unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then |
8933 |
get confused by it. |
8934 |
|
8935 |
If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must |
8936 |
set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil. |
8937 |
|
8938 |
** Changes in dynamic abbrevs. |
8939 |
|
8940 |
*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case |
8941 |
conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first |
8942 |
character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion |
8943 |
including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim. |
8944 |
|
8945 |
The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has |
8946 |
mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always |
8947 |
copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps. |
8948 |
|
8949 |
*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search' |
8950 |
are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible |
8951 |
values. |
8952 |
|
8953 |
`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve |
8954 |
case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace). |
8955 |
`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore |
8956 |
case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search). |
8957 |
|
8958 |
** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a |
8959 |
certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they |
8960 |
can be. The default value is 30. |
8961 |
|
8962 |
** Changes in Mail mode. |
8963 |
|
8964 |
*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly. |
8965 |
Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail |
8966 |
composition mechanism you have selected with the variable |
8967 |
`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is |
8968 |
`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old |
8969 |
behavior. |
8970 |
|
8971 |
C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs |
8972 |
compose-mail-other-frame. |
8973 |
|
8974 |
*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use |
8975 |
the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are |
8976 |
replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the |
8977 |
buffer that shows the original message. |
8978 |
|
8979 |
*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message, |
8980 |
with separator lines around the contents. |
8981 |
|
8982 |
*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases |
8983 |
in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias |
8984 |
definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not |
8985 |
need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail. |
8986 |
|
8987 |
*** New features in the mail-complete command. |
8988 |
|
8989 |
**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name, |
8990 |
for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style |
8991 |
controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all. |
8992 |
Its values are like those of mail-from-style. |
8993 |
|
8994 |
**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command |
8995 |
to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in |
8996 |
/etc/passwd. |
8997 |
|
8998 |
**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read |
8999 |
to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used: |
9000 |
/etc/passwd. |
9001 |
|
9002 |
** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of |
9003 |
special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a |
9004 |
directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a |
9005 |
reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'. |
9006 |
|
9007 |
Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as |
9008 |
when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise |
9009 |
be taken to be magic. |
9010 |
|
9011 |
** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select |
9012 |
files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is |
9013 |
available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep. |
9014 |
|
9015 |
M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that. |
9016 |
(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.) |
9017 |
|
9018 |
** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names |
9019 |
suggest they are probably not needed in the long run. |
9020 |
|
9021 |
In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands. |
9022 |
|
9023 |
new key dired.el binding old key |
9024 |
------- ---------------- ------- |
9025 |
* c dired-change-marks c |
9026 |
* m dired-mark m |
9027 |
* * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted) |
9028 |
* / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted) |
9029 |
* @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted) |
9030 |
* u dired-unmark u |
9031 |
* DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL |
9032 |
* ? dired-unmark-all-files C-M-? |
9033 |
* ! dired-unmark-all-marks |
9034 |
* % dired-mark-files-regexp % m |
9035 |
* C-n dired-next-marked-file M-} |
9036 |
* C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{ |
9037 |
|
9038 |
** Rmail changes. |
9039 |
|
9040 |
*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it |
9041 |
saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer |
9042 |
chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing |
9043 |
each time you run it. |
9044 |
|
9045 |
*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls |
9046 |
whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes. |
9047 |
|
9048 |
*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete |
9049 |
messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument |
9050 |
means to move in the opposite direction. |
9051 |
|
9052 |
*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets |
9053 |
you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned. |
9054 |
|
9055 |
*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes |
9056 |
just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers. |
9057 |
It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you |
9058 |
can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used |
9059 |
for output. |
9060 |
|
9061 |
** Gnus changes. |
9062 |
|
9063 |
*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion. |
9064 |
|
9065 |
*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into |
9066 |
Gnus. |
9067 |
|
9068 |
*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like |
9069 |
`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection. |
9070 |
|
9071 |
*** Article washing status can be displayed in the |
9072 |
article mode line. |
9073 |
|
9074 |
*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files. |
9075 |
|
9076 |
*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID. |
9077 |
|
9078 |
(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t) |
9079 |
|
9080 |
*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files |
9081 |
are to be considered home score and adapt files. See |
9082 |
`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'. |
9083 |
|
9084 |
*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics. |
9085 |
|
9086 |
*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable. |
9087 |
|
9088 |
*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions. |
9089 |
See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'. |
9090 |
|
9091 |
*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like. |
9092 |
Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be |
9093 |
used to pick articles. |
9094 |
|
9095 |
*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to |
9096 |
another have been added. |
9097 |
|
9098 |
`M-x gnus-change-server' |
9099 |
|
9100 |
*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when |
9101 |
generating lines in buffers. |
9102 |
|
9103 |
*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with |
9104 |
`C-M-_'. |
9105 |
|
9106 |
*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'. |
9107 |
|
9108 |
*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis: |
9109 |
|
9110 |
(setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word)) |
9111 |
|
9112 |
*** Scores can be decayed. |
9113 |
|
9114 |
(setq gnus-decay-scores t) |
9115 |
|
9116 |
*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The |
9117 |
Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first. |
9118 |
|
9119 |
*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from |
9120 |
the native server. |
9121 |
|
9122 |
`M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups' |
9123 |
|
9124 |
*** A new command for reading collections of documents |
9125 |
(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `C-M-d'. |
9126 |
|
9127 |
*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped. |
9128 |
|
9129 |
*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post |
9130 |
even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting. |
9131 |
|
9132 |
*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines |
9133 |
(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added. |
9134 |
|
9135 |
Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such |
9136 |
a group. |
9137 |
|
9138 |
*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard |
9139 |
sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently. |
9140 |
|
9141 |
See the commands under the `T S' submap. |
9142 |
|
9143 |
*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently. |
9144 |
|
9145 |
See the commands under the `G P' submap. |
9146 |
|
9147 |
*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups. |
9148 |
|
9149 |
Use the `Y c' command. |
9150 |
|
9151 |
*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order. |
9152 |
|
9153 |
*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated. |
9154 |
|
9155 |
`M-x nnmail-split-history' |
9156 |
|
9157 |
*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk |
9158 |
from incoming mail before saving the mail. |
9159 |
|
9160 |
See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'. |
9161 |
|
9162 |
*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files. |
9163 |
|
9164 |
*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute |
9165 |
the following code, for instance, in your .emacs. |
9166 |
|
9167 |
(add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize) |
9168 |
|
9169 |
Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically |
9170 |
and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime |
9171 |
from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this |
9172 |
hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling |
9173 |
this issue.) |
9174 |
|
9175 |
Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems |
9176 |
automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a |
9177 |
particular news group. This can be done by: |
9178 |
|
9179 |
(gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM) |
9180 |
|
9181 |
Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree |
9182 |
of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under |
9183 |
"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding |
9184 |
system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both |
9185 |
for reading and posting). |
9186 |
|
9187 |
CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form |
9188 |
(READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM) |
9189 |
Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the |
9190 |
newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages |
9191 |
there. |
9192 |
|
9193 |
Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by |
9194 |
default. Here are some of these default settings: |
9195 |
|
9196 |
(gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7) |
9197 |
(gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312) |
9198 |
(gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312) |
9199 |
(gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5) |
9200 |
(gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr)) |
9201 |
|
9202 |
When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored; |
9203 |
the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual. |
9204 |
|
9205 |
** CC mode changes. |
9206 |
|
9207 |
*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java) |
9208 |
code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global |
9209 |
values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do |
9210 |
this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file. |
9211 |
Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is |
9212 |
loaded. |
9213 |
|
9214 |
If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, |
9215 |
Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode |
9216 |
style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers |
9217 |
share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set |
9218 |
c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you |
9219 |
must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded. |
9220 |
|
9221 |
*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name |
9222 |
of the current buffer. |
9223 |
|
9224 |
*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because |
9225 |
it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles |
9226 |
of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use. |
9227 |
|
9228 |
*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C |
9229 |
style that the Python developers like. |
9230 |
|
9231 |
*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace. |
9232 |
This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line, |
9233 |
just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line. |
9234 |
|
9235 |
** VC Changes [new] |
9236 |
|
9237 |
*** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot |
9238 |
name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current |
9239 |
directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked). |
9240 |
|
9241 |
This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common |
9242 |
master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other |
9243 |
developers. |
9244 |
|
9245 |
You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q |
9246 |
RET in a buffer visiting that file. |
9247 |
|
9248 |
*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by |
9249 |
other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a |
9250 |
writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then |
9251 |
calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it. |
9252 |
|
9253 |
*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for |
9254 |
version numbers, based on the current state of the file. |
9255 |
|
9256 |
** Calendar changes. |
9257 |
|
9258 |
*** A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or |
9259 |
subclasses of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow |
9260 |
you do this for the year of the selected date, or the |
9261 |
following/previous years. |
9262 |
|
9263 |
*** There is now support for the Baha'i calendar system. Use `pb' in |
9264 |
the *Calendar* buffer to display the current Baha'i date. The Baha'i |
9265 |
calendar, or "Badi calendar" is a system of 19 months with 19 days |
9266 |
each, and 4 intercalary days (5 during a Gregorian leap year). The |
9267 |
calendar begins May 23, 1844, with each of the months named after a |
9268 |
supposed attribute of God. |
9269 |
|
9270 |
** ps-print changes |
9271 |
|
9272 |
There are some new user variables and subgroups for customizing the page |
9273 |
layout. |
9274 |
|
9275 |
*** Headers & Footers (subgroup) |
9276 |
|
9277 |
Some printer systems print a header page and force the first page to |
9278 |
be printed on the back of the header page when using duplex. If your |
9279 |
printer system has this behavior, set variable |
9280 |
`ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' to t. |
9281 |
|
9282 |
If variable `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' is non-nil, it prints a |
9283 |
blank page as the very first printed page. So, it behaves as if the |
9284 |
very first character of buffer (or region) were a form feed ^L (\014). |
9285 |
|
9286 |
The variable `ps-spool-config' specifies who is responsible for |
9287 |
setting duplex mode and page size. Valid values are: |
9288 |
|
9289 |
lpr-switches duplex and page size are configured by `ps-lpr-switches'. |
9290 |
Don't forget to set `ps-lpr-switches' to select duplex |
9291 |
printing for your printer. |
9292 |
|
9293 |
setpagedevice duplex and page size are configured by ps-print using the |
9294 |
setpagedevice PostScript operator. |
9295 |
|
9296 |
nil duplex and page size are configured by ps-print *not* using |
9297 |
the setpagedevice PostScript operator. |
9298 |
|
9299 |
The variable `ps-spool-tumble' specifies how the page images on |
9300 |
opposite sides of a sheet are oriented with respect to each other. If |
9301 |
`ps-spool-tumble' is nil, ps-print produces output suitable for |
9302 |
bindings on the left or right. If `ps-spool-tumble' is non-nil, |
9303 |
ps-print produces output suitable for bindings at the top or bottom. |
9304 |
This variable takes effect only if `ps-spool-duplex' is non-nil. |
9305 |
The default value is nil. |
9306 |
|
9307 |
The variable `ps-header-frame-alist' specifies a header frame |
9308 |
properties alist. Valid frame properties are: |
9309 |
|
9310 |
fore-color Specify the foreground frame color. |
9311 |
Value should be a float number between 0.0 (black |
9312 |
color) and 1.0 (white color), or a string which is a |
9313 |
color name, or a list of 3 float numbers which |
9314 |
correspond to the Red Green Blue color scale, each |
9315 |
float number between 0.0 (dark color) and 1.0 (bright |
9316 |
color). The default is 0 ("black"). |
9317 |
|
9318 |
back-color Specify the background frame color (similar to fore-color). |
9319 |
The default is 0.9 ("gray90"). |
9320 |
|
9321 |
shadow-color Specify the shadow color (similar to fore-color). |
9322 |
The default is 0 ("black"). |
9323 |
|
9324 |
border-color Specify the border color (similar to fore-color). |
9325 |
The default is 0 ("black"). |
9326 |
|
9327 |
border-width Specify the border width. |
9328 |
The default is 0.4. |
9329 |
|
9330 |
Any other property is ignored. |
9331 |
|
9332 |
Don't change this alist directly; instead use Custom, or the |
9333 |
`ps-value', `ps-get', `ps-put' and `ps-del' functions (see there for |
9334 |
documentation). |
9335 |
|
9336 |
Ps-print can also print footers. The footer variables are: |
9337 |
`ps-print-footer', `ps-footer-offset', `ps-print-footer-frame', |
9338 |
`ps-footer-font-family', `ps-footer-font-size', `ps-footer-line-pad', |
9339 |
`ps-footer-lines', `ps-left-footer', `ps-right-footer' and |
9340 |
`ps-footer-frame-alist'. These variables are similar to those |
9341 |
controlling headers. |
9342 |
|
9343 |
*** Color management (subgroup) |
9344 |
|
9345 |
If `ps-print-color-p' is non-nil, the buffer's text will be printed in |
9346 |
color. |
9347 |
|
9348 |
*** Face Management (subgroup) |
9349 |
|
9350 |
If you need to print without worrying about face background colors, |
9351 |
set the variable `ps-use-face-background' which specifies if face |
9352 |
background should be used. Valid values are: |
9353 |
|
9354 |
t always use face background color. |
9355 |
nil never use face background color. |
9356 |
(face...) list of faces whose background color will be used. |
9357 |
|
9358 |
*** N-up printing (subgroup) |
9359 |
|
9360 |
The variable `ps-n-up-printing' specifies the number of pages per |
9361 |
sheet of paper. |
9362 |
|
9363 |
The variable `ps-n-up-margin' specifies the margin in points (pt) |
9364 |
between the sheet border and the n-up printing. |
9365 |
|
9366 |
If variable `ps-n-up-border-p' is non-nil, a border is drawn around |
9367 |
each page. |
9368 |
|
9369 |
The variable `ps-n-up-filling' specifies how the page matrix is filled |
9370 |
on each sheet of paper. Following are the valid values for |
9371 |
`ps-n-up-filling' with a filling example using a 3x4 page matrix: |
9372 |
|
9373 |
`left-top' 1 2 3 4 `left-bottom' 9 10 11 12 |
9374 |
5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 |
9375 |
9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 |
9376 |
|
9377 |
`right-top' 4 3 2 1 `right-bottom' 12 11 10 9 |
9378 |
8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 |
9379 |
12 11 10 9 4 3 2 1 |
9380 |
|
9381 |
`top-left' 1 4 7 10 `bottom-left' 3 6 9 12 |
9382 |
2 5 8 11 2 5 8 11 |
9383 |
3 6 9 12 1 4 7 10 |
9384 |
|
9385 |
`top-right' 10 7 4 1 `bottom-right' 12 9 6 3 |
9386 |
11 8 5 2 11 8 5 2 |
9387 |
12 9 6 3 10 7 4 1 |
9388 |
|
9389 |
Any other value is treated as `left-top'. |
9390 |
|
9391 |
*** Zebra stripes (subgroup) |
9392 |
|
9393 |
The variable `ps-zebra-color' controls the zebra stripes grayscale or |
9394 |
RGB color. |
9395 |
|
9396 |
The variable `ps-zebra-stripe-follow' specifies how zebra stripes |
9397 |
continue on next page. Visually, valid values are (the character `+' |
9398 |
to the right of each column indicates that a line is printed): |
9399 |
|
9400 |
`nil' `follow' `full' `full-follow' |
9401 |
Current Page -------- ----------- --------- ---------------- |
9402 |
1 XXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXX + 1 XXXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
9403 |
2 XXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXX + 2 XXXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
9404 |
3 XXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXX + 3 XXXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
9405 |
4 + 4 + 4 + 4 + |
9406 |
5 + 5 + 5 + 5 + |
9407 |
6 + 6 + 6 + 6 + |
9408 |
7 XXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXX + 7 XXXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
9409 |
8 XXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXX + 8 XXXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
9410 |
9 XXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXX + 9 XXXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
9411 |
10 + 10 + |
9412 |
11 + 11 + |
9413 |
-------- ----------- --------- ---------------- |
9414 |
Next Page -------- ----------- --------- ---------------- |
9415 |
12 XXXXX + 12 + 10 XXXXXX + 10 + |
9416 |
13 XXXXX + 13 XXXXXXXX + 11 XXXXXX + 11 + |
9417 |
14 XXXXX + 14 XXXXXXXX + 12 XXXXXX + 12 + |
9418 |
15 + 15 XXXXXXXX + 13 + 13 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
9419 |
16 + 16 + 14 + 14 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
9420 |
17 + 17 + 15 + 15 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
9421 |
18 XXXXX + 18 + 16 XXXXXX + 16 + |
9422 |
19 XXXXX + 19 XXXXXXXX + 17 XXXXXX + 17 + |
9423 |
20 XXXXX + 20 XXXXXXXX + 18 XXXXXX + 18 + |
9424 |
21 + 21 XXXXXXXX + |
9425 |
22 + 22 + |
9426 |
-------- ----------- --------- ---------------- |
9427 |
|
9428 |
Any other value is treated as `nil'. |
9429 |
|
9430 |
|
9431 |
*** Printer management (subgroup) |
9432 |
|
9433 |
The variable `ps-printer-name-option' determines the option used by |
9434 |
some utilities to indicate the printer name; it's used only when |
9435 |
`ps-printer-name' is a non-empty string. If you're using the lpr |
9436 |
utility to print, for example, `ps-printer-name-option' should be set |
9437 |
to "-P". |
9438 |
|
9439 |
The variable `ps-manual-feed' indicates if the printer requires manual |
9440 |
paper feeding. If it's nil, automatic feeding takes place. If it's |
9441 |
non-nil, manual feeding takes place. |
9442 |
|
9443 |
The variable `ps-end-with-control-d' specifies whether C-d (\x04) |
9444 |
should be inserted at end of the generated PostScript. Non-nil means |
9445 |
do so. |
9446 |
|
9447 |
*** Page settings (subgroup) |
9448 |
|
9449 |
If variable `ps-warn-paper-type' is nil, it's *not* treated as an |
9450 |
error if the PostScript printer doesn't have a paper with the size |
9451 |
indicated by `ps-paper-type'; the default paper size will be used |
9452 |
instead. If `ps-warn-paper-type' is non-nil, an error is signaled if |
9453 |
the PostScript printer doesn't support a paper with the size indicated |
9454 |
by `ps-paper-type'. This is used when `ps-spool-config' is set to |
9455 |
`setpagedevice'. |
9456 |
|
9457 |
The variable `ps-print-upside-down' determines the orientation for |
9458 |
printing pages: nil means `normal' printing, non-nil means |
9459 |
`upside-down' printing (that is, the page is rotated by 180 degrees). |
9460 |
|
9461 |
The variable `ps-selected-pages' specifies which pages to print. If |
9462 |
it's nil, all pages are printed. If it's a list, list elements may be |
9463 |
integers specifying a single page to print, or cons cells (FROM . TO) |
9464 |
specifying to print from page FROM to TO. Invalid list elements, that |
9465 |
is integers smaller than one, or elements whose FROM is greater than |
9466 |
its TO, are ignored. |
9467 |
|
9468 |
The variable `ps-even-or-odd-pages' specifies how to print even/odd |
9469 |
pages. Valid values are: |
9470 |
|
9471 |
nil print all pages. |
9472 |
|
9473 |
`even-page' print only even pages. |
9474 |
|
9475 |
`odd-page' print only odd pages. |
9476 |
|
9477 |
`even-sheet' print only even sheets. |
9478 |
That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like |
9479 |
`even-page', but for values greater than 1, it'll |
9480 |
print only the even sheet of paper. |
9481 |
|
9482 |
`odd-sheet' print only odd sheets. |
9483 |
That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like |
9484 |
`odd-page'; but for values greater than 1, it'll print |
9485 |
only the odd sheet of paper. |
9486 |
|
9487 |
Any other value is treated as nil. |
9488 |
|
9489 |
If you set `ps-selected-pages' (see there for documentation), pages |
9490 |
are filtered by `ps-selected-pages', and then by |
9491 |
`ps-even-or-odd-pages'. For example, if we have: |
9492 |
|
9493 |
(setq ps-selected-pages '(1 4 (6 . 10) (12 . 16) 20)) |
9494 |
|
9495 |
and we combine this with `ps-even-or-odd-pages' and |
9496 |
`ps-n-up-printing', we get: |
9497 |
|
9498 |
`ps-n-up-printing' = 1: |
9499 |
`ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED |
9500 |
nil 1, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 20 |
9501 |
even-page 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20 |
9502 |
odd-page 1, 7, 9, 13, 15 |
9503 |
even-sheet 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20 |
9504 |
odd-sheet 1, 7, 9, 13, 15 |
9505 |
|
9506 |
`ps-n-up-printing' = 2: |
9507 |
`ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED |
9508 |
nil 1/4, 6/7, 8/9, 10/12, 13/14, 15/16, 20 |
9509 |
even-page 4/6, 8/10, 12/14, 16/20 |
9510 |
odd-page 1/7, 9/13, 15 |
9511 |
even-sheet 6/7, 10/12, 15/16 |
9512 |
odd-sheet 1/4, 8/9, 13/14, 20 |
9513 |
|
9514 |
*** Miscellany (subgroup) |
9515 |
|
9516 |
The variable `ps-error-handler-message' specifies where error handler |
9517 |
messages should be sent. |
9518 |
|
9519 |
It is also possible to add a user-defined PostScript prologue code in |
9520 |
front of all generated prologue code by setting the variable |
9521 |
`ps-user-defined-prologue'. |
9522 |
|
9523 |
The variable `ps-line-number-font' specifies the font for line numbers. |
9524 |
|
9525 |
The variable `ps-line-number-font-size' specifies the font size in |
9526 |
points for line numbers. |
9527 |
|
9528 |
The variable `ps-line-number-color' specifies the color for line |
9529 |
numbers. See `ps-zebra-color' for documentation. |
9530 |
|
9531 |
The variable `ps-line-number-step' specifies the interval in which |
9532 |
line numbers are printed. For example, if `ps-line-number-step' is set |
9533 |
to 2, the printing will look like: |
9534 |
|
9535 |
1 one line |
9536 |
one line |
9537 |
3 one line |
9538 |
one line |
9539 |
5 one line |
9540 |
one line |
9541 |
... |
9542 |
|
9543 |
Valid values are: |
9544 |
|
9545 |
integer an integer specifying the interval in which line numbers are |
9546 |
printed. If it's smaller than or equal to zero, 1 |
9547 |
is used. |
9548 |
|
9549 |
`zebra' specifies that only the line number of the first line in a |
9550 |
zebra stripe is to be printed. |
9551 |
|
9552 |
Any other value is treated as `zebra'. |
9553 |
|
9554 |
The variable `ps-line-number-start' specifies the starting point in |
9555 |
the interval given by `ps-line-number-step'. For example, if |
9556 |
`ps-line-number-step' is set to 3, and `ps-line-number-start' is set to |
9557 |
3, the output will look like: |
9558 |
|
9559 |
one line |
9560 |
one line |
9561 |
3 one line |
9562 |
one line |
9563 |
one line |
9564 |
6 one line |
9565 |
one line |
9566 |
one line |
9567 |
9 one line |
9568 |
one line |
9569 |
... |
9570 |
|
9571 |
The variable `ps-postscript-code-directory' specifies the directory |
9572 |
where the PostScript prologue file used by ps-print is found. |
9573 |
|
9574 |
The variable `ps-line-spacing' determines the line spacing in points, |
9575 |
for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to |
9576 |
`ps-font-size'). |
9577 |
|
9578 |
The variable `ps-paragraph-spacing' determines the paragraph spacing, |
9579 |
in points, for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to |
9580 |
`ps-font-size'). |
9581 |
|
9582 |
The variable `ps-paragraph-regexp' specifies the paragraph delimiter. |
9583 |
|
9584 |
The variable `ps-begin-cut-regexp' and `ps-end-cut-regexp' specify the |
9585 |
start and end of a region to cut out when printing. |
9586 |
|
9587 |
** hideshow changes. |
9588 |
|
9589 |
*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for |
9590 |
C++, ; for lisp). |
9591 |
|
9592 |
*** Support for java-mode added. |
9593 |
|
9594 |
*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments |
9595 |
in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set. |
9596 |
|
9597 |
*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the comments at |
9598 |
the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your |
9599 |
way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'. |
9600 |
|
9601 |
*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more |
9602 |
robust and a lot faster. |
9603 |
|
9604 |
*** A block beginning can span multiple lines. |
9605 |
|
9606 |
*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow |
9607 |
to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the |
9608 |
documentation for more details. |
9609 |
|
9610 |
** Changes in Enriched mode. |
9611 |
|
9612 |
*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is |
9613 |
filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent |
9614 |
of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in |
9615 |
use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled |
9616 |
the next time unless the fill-column is different. |
9617 |
|
9618 |
*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs |
9619 |
distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines |
9620 |
as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked |
9621 |
as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text. |
9622 |
|
9623 |
** Font Lock mode |
9624 |
|
9625 |
*** Custom support |
9626 |
|
9627 |
The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and |
9628 |
font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the |
9629 |
faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom |
9630 |
group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in |
9631 |
your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should |
9632 |
consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize. |
9633 |
|
9634 |
You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances. |
9635 |
|
9636 |
*** Maximum decoration |
9637 |
|
9638 |
Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by |
9639 |
default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level |
9640 |
of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration |
9641 |
supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil |
9642 |
to get the old behavior. |
9643 |
|
9644 |
*** New support |
9645 |
|
9646 |
Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes. |
9647 |
|
9648 |
Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes |
9649 |
support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode. |
9650 |
|
9651 |
*** Configurable support |
9652 |
|
9653 |
Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for |
9654 |
additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types, |
9655 |
c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it, |
9656 |
java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a |
9657 |
list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value |
9658 |
of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the |
9659 |
convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification. |
9660 |
|
9661 |
Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever |
9662 |
way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make |
9663 |
it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types. |
9664 |
|
9665 |
*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support |
9666 |
|
9667 |
You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own |
9668 |
highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs, |
9669 |
for any mode. |
9670 |
|
9671 |
For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put: |
9672 |
|
9673 |
(font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t))) |
9674 |
|
9675 |
in your ~/.emacs. |
9676 |
|
9677 |
*** New faces |
9678 |
|
9679 |
Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and |
9680 |
font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords, |
9681 |
distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought |
9682 |
to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces. |
9683 |
|
9684 |
*** Changes to fast-lock support mode |
9685 |
|
9686 |
The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process |
9687 |
cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the |
9688 |
same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature. |
9689 |
|
9690 |
*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode |
9691 |
|
9692 |
The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify |
9693 |
according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use |
9694 |
the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If |
9695 |
non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be |
9696 |
refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only |
9697 |
the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy |
9698 |
Lock mode behavior and the behavior of Font Lock mode. |
9699 |
|
9700 |
This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines. |
9701 |
For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if |
9702 |
this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly |
9703 |
refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line |
9704 |
containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use |
9705 |
the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines. |
9706 |
|
9707 |
As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed: |
9708 |
|
9709 |
Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'. |
9710 |
Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number. |
9711 |
Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the |
9712 |
new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'. |
9713 |
|
9714 |
If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those |
9715 |
settings. |
9716 |
|
9717 |
** Ada mode changes. |
9718 |
|
9719 |
*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode. |
9720 |
If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same |
9721 |
procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but |
9722 |
you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure |
9723 |
stubs. |
9724 |
|
9725 |
*** There are two new commands: |
9726 |
- `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer |
9727 |
- `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer. |
9728 |
|
9729 |
The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options', |
9730 |
`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and |
9731 |
`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands. |
9732 |
|
9733 |
*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level |
9734 |
is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs. |
9735 |
Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented. |
9736 |
|
9737 |
*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of |
9738 |
formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start, |
9739 |
places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one |
9740 |
space between a comma and the beginning of a word. |
9741 |
|
9742 |
** Scheme mode changes. |
9743 |
|
9744 |
*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp |
9745 |
mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used |
9746 |
for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables |
9747 |
with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer |
9748 |
have any effect. |
9749 |
|
9750 |
If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is |
9751 |
still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to |
9752 |
scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation |
9753 |
variables as buffer-local variables. |
9754 |
|
9755 |
*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts. |
9756 |
Use M-x dsssl-mode. |
9757 |
|
9758 |
** Changes to the emacsclient program |
9759 |
|
9760 |
*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or |
9761 |
USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID |
9762 |
associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root |
9763 |
can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user. |
9764 |
|
9765 |
*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells |
9766 |
it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the |
9767 |
buffer in Emacs. |
9768 |
|
9769 |
*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to |
9770 |
use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable |
9771 |
ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line |
9772 |
option takes precedence. |
9773 |
|
9774 |
** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area |
9775 |
constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point |
9776 |
(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only). |
9777 |
|
9778 |
** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun, |
9779 |
which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just |
9780 |
the current defun. |
9781 |
|
9782 |
** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all |
9783 |
following arguments are treated as ordinary file names. |
9784 |
|
9785 |
** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk, |
9786 |
and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if |
9787 |
necessary). |
9788 |
|
9789 |
** When you kill a buffer that visits a file, |
9790 |
if there are any registers that save positions in the file, |
9791 |
these register values no longer become completely useless. |
9792 |
If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are |
9793 |
asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes, |
9794 |
it visits the file and then goes to the same position. |
9795 |
|
9796 |
** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for |
9797 |
example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may |
9798 |
be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever |
9799 |
you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f. |
9800 |
|
9801 |
You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the |
9802 |
variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a |
9803 |
file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and |
9804 |
revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but |
9805 |
only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself. |
9806 |
|
9807 |
** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font |
9808 |
since it applies only to the current frame. |
9809 |
|
9810 |
** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the |
9811 |
file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil, |
9812 |
and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.) |
9813 |
|
9814 |
This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of |
9815 |
multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local |
9816 |
variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for |
9817 |
tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document |
9818 |
instead of just the file you are editing. |
9819 |
|
9820 |
** RefTeX mode |
9821 |
|
9822 |
RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref |
9823 |
and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of |
9824 |
different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for |
9825 |
multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and |
9826 |
turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands: |
9827 |
|
9828 |
C-c ( reftex-label |
9829 |
Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and |
9830 |
knows which kind of label is needed. |
9831 |
|
9832 |
C-c ) reftex-reference |
9833 |
Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the |
9834 |
label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}. |
9835 |
|
9836 |
C-c [ reftex-citation |
9837 |
Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX |
9838 |
database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro. |
9839 |
|
9840 |
C-c & reftex-view-crossref |
9841 |
Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point. |
9842 |
|
9843 |
C-c = reftex-toc |
9844 |
Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you |
9845 |
can quickly jump to every section. |
9846 |
|
9847 |
Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional |
9848 |
commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature. |
9849 |
Full documentation and customization examples are in the file |
9850 |
reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation: |
9851 |
C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el |
9852 |
|
9853 |
** Changes in BibTeX mode. |
9854 |
|
9855 |
*** Info documentation is now available. |
9856 |
|
9857 |
*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused |
9858 |
both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode. |
9859 |
|
9860 |
*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to |
9861 |
bibtex-user-optional-fields. |
9862 |
|
9863 |
*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote |
9864 |
(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead). |
9865 |
|
9866 |
*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete |
9867 |
entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by |
9868 |
appropriate functions. |
9869 |
|
9870 |
*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of |
9871 |
entries. They are bound by default to C-M-l and C-M-h. |
9872 |
|
9873 |
*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has |
9874 |
been cleaned. |
9875 |
|
9876 |
*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables |
9877 |
bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter. |
9878 |
|
9879 |
*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries |
9880 |
shall be delimited. |
9881 |
|
9882 |
*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of |
9883 |
bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and |
9884 |
bibtex-include-OPTkey for details. |
9885 |
|
9886 |
*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor |
9887 |
field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are |
9888 |
prefixed with `ALT'. |
9889 |
|
9890 |
*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable |
9891 |
bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many |
9892 |
formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable |
9893 |
documentation). |
9894 |
|
9895 |
*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See |
9896 |
documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions |
9897 |
for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too. |
9898 |
|
9899 |
*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if |
9900 |
comma should be inserted at end of last field. |
9901 |
|
9902 |
*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if |
9903 |
alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal |
9904 |
signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation). |
9905 |
|
9906 |
*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries. |
9907 |
|
9908 |
*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer. |
9909 |
|
9910 |
*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database |
9911 |
from alien sources. |
9912 |
|
9913 |
*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string) |
9914 |
to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in |
9915 |
crossref entries. |
9916 |
|
9917 |
*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or |
9918 |
region. |
9919 |
|
9920 |
*** Added support for imenu. |
9921 |
|
9922 |
*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead |
9923 |
of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a |
9924 |
`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g. |
9925 |
`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors. |
9926 |
|
9927 |
*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files |
9928 |
from `bibtex-string-files' are searched. |
9929 |
|
9930 |
** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative. |
9931 |
|
9932 |
** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow. |
9933 |
|
9934 |
** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the |
9935 |
functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem. |
9936 |
Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory |
9937 |
as an argument. |
9938 |
|
9939 |
When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read |
9940 |
and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed). |
9941 |
|
9942 |
** browse-url changes |
9943 |
|
9944 |
*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm), |
9945 |
Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window |
9946 |
(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic |
9947 |
non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated |
9948 |
customization variables. |
9949 |
|
9950 |
*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'. |
9951 |
|
9952 |
*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across |
9953 |
lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps |
9954 |
(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'. |
9955 |
|
9956 |
** Changes in Ediff |
9957 |
|
9958 |
*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel |
9959 |
pops up the Info file for this command. |
9960 |
|
9961 |
*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether |
9962 |
the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when |
9963 |
merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different |
9964 |
directories). |
9965 |
|
9966 |
*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare |
9967 |
and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of |
9968 |
files in the same directory. |
9969 |
|
9970 |
*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively. |
9971 |
The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug |
9972 |
related to the GNU format has now been fixed.) |
9973 |
|
9974 |
** Changes in Viper |
9975 |
|
9976 |
*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip |
9977 |
*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper- |
9978 |
instead of vip-. |
9979 |
*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states. |
9980 |
*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next |
9981 |
Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before. |
9982 |
*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states. |
9983 |
*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state. |
9984 |
*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor |
9985 |
color when Viper is in insert state. |
9986 |
*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window, |
9987 |
Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable |
9988 |
viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior. |
9989 |
|
9990 |
** Etags changes. |
9991 |
|
9992 |
*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by |
9993 |
default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average. |
9994 |
Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag |
9995 |
variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does |
9996 |
not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on. |
9997 |
|
9998 |
*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags. |
9999 |
|
10000 |
*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements" |
10001 |
constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java. |
10002 |
|
10003 |
*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are |
10004 |
recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax). |
10005 |
In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash. |
10006 |
|
10007 |
*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and |
10008 |
C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags |
10009 |
recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories, |
10010 |
methods and protocols. |
10011 |
|
10012 |
*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension |
10013 |
.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in |
10014 |
column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a |
10015 |
paragraph name. |
10016 |
|
10017 |
*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of |
10018 |
an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression |
10019 |
at least M times and as many as N times. |
10020 |
|
10021 |
** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert |
10022 |
in files has changed slightly. |
10023 |
|
10024 |
With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string, |
10025 |
time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it. |
10026 |
This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility |
10027 |
with old time-stamp-format values. |
10028 |
|
10029 |
In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign |
10030 |
(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character. |
10031 |
This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility |
10032 |
reasons. |
10033 |
|
10034 |
In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their |
10035 |
natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a |
10036 |
fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon |
10037 |
(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical |
10038 |
time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are |
10039 |
specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d". |
10040 |
|
10041 |
Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the |
10042 |
case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit |
10043 |
truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway. |
10044 |
|
10045 |
The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are |
10046 |
being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the |
10047 |
future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being |
10048 |
recommended now will continue to work then. |
10049 |
|
10050 |
See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for |
10051 |
details. |
10052 |
|
10053 |
** There are some additional major modes: |
10054 |
|
10055 |
dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files. |
10056 |
m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input. |
10057 |
meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files. |
10058 |
|
10059 |
** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you |
10060 |
copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell |
10061 |
into Emacs. |
10062 |
|
10063 |
** New Lisp packages include: |
10064 |
|
10065 |
*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops. |
10066 |
|
10067 |
*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might |
10068 |
be used for adding some indecent words to your email. |
10069 |
|
10070 |
*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor. |
10071 |
|
10072 |
*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes |
10073 |
in shell buffers. |
10074 |
|
10075 |
*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code. |
10076 |
See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer' |
10077 |
and `elint-defun'. |
10078 |
|
10079 |
*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is |
10080 |
meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary |
10081 |
ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within |
10082 |
strings or comments. |
10083 |
|
10084 |
These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an |
10085 |
abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev, |
10086 |
you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these |
10087 |
insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text |
10088 |
at these points. |
10089 |
|
10090 |
*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you |
10091 |
can visit them by short forms of their names. |
10092 |
|
10093 |
*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded |
10094 |
Emacs Lisp function at point. |
10095 |
|
10096 |
*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture. |
10097 |
|
10098 |
*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like |
10099 |
switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way. |
10100 |
|
10101 |
*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning. |
10102 |
|
10103 |
*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program. |
10104 |
|
10105 |
*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input. |
10106 |
|
10107 |
*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations |
10108 |
from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed. |
10109 |
|
10110 |
*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature. |
10111 |
You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically |
10112 |
inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its |
10113 |
original place after inserting the copy. |
10114 |
|
10115 |
*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2 |
10116 |
on the buffer. |
10117 |
|
10118 |
You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the |
10119 |
velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll |
10120 |
(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed. |
10121 |
|
10122 |
Enable mouse-drag with: |
10123 |
(global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw) |
10124 |
-or- |
10125 |
(global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag) |
10126 |
|
10127 |
*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have |
10128 |
mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail. |
10129 |
|
10130 |
*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave. |
10131 |
It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess. |
10132 |
|
10133 |
*** ogonek |
10134 |
|
10135 |
The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of |
10136 |
Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various |
10137 |
platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and |
10138 |
TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to |
10139 |
ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to |
10140 |
prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for |
10141 |
instance) and vice versa. |
10142 |
|
10143 |
To use this package load it using |
10144 |
M-x load-library [enter] ogonek |
10145 |
Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of |
10146 |
M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish |
10147 |
M-x ogonek-how -- in English |
10148 |
The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the |
10149 |
ways of customization in `.emacs'. |
10150 |
|
10151 |
*** Interface to ph. |
10152 |
|
10153 |
Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi) |
10154 |
|
10155 |
The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory |
10156 |
services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to |
10157 |
these servers. |
10158 |
|
10159 |
*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email. |
10160 |
|
10161 |
*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature. |
10162 |
You can move the virtual cursor with special commands |
10163 |
while the real cursor does not move. |
10164 |
|
10165 |
*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up |
10166 |
for visiting your favorite web sites. |
10167 |
|
10168 |
*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations, |
10169 |
so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used. |
10170 |
|
10171 |
** movemail change |
10172 |
|
10173 |
Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP |
10174 |
mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer |
10175 |
supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the |
10176 |
user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server. |
10177 |
|
10178 |
This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before. |
10179 |
|
10180 |
* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows. |
10181 |
|
10182 |
** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files. |
10183 |
|
10184 |
Emacs handles three different conventions for representing |
10185 |
end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the |
10186 |
Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific |
10187 |
file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special |
10188 |
file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention. |
10189 |
|
10190 |
To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use |
10191 |
C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different |
10192 |
coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly |
10193 |
specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with |
10194 |
LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to |
10195 |
save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos. |
10196 |
|
10197 |
* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1 |
10198 |
|
10199 |
** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in |
10200 |
Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And |
10201 |
vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in |
10202 |
Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20. |
10203 |
|
10204 |
** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed |
10205 |
to start with w32- instead of win32-. |
10206 |
|
10207 |
In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We |
10208 |
don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it |
10209 |
"win". |
10210 |
|
10211 |
** Basic Lisp changes |
10212 |
|
10213 |
*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically |
10214 |
evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant. |
10215 |
|
10216 |
*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now |
10217 |
be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program |
10218 |
or by the user. |
10219 |
|
10220 |
The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed. |
10221 |
|
10222 |
*** There are new macros `when' and `unless' |
10223 |
|
10224 |
(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...)) |
10225 |
(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...) |
10226 |
|
10227 |
*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their |
10228 |
usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of |
10229 |
its argument. |
10230 |
|
10231 |
*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties. |
10232 |
|
10233 |
*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function. |
10234 |
|
10235 |
*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors. |
10236 |
|
10237 |
*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an |
10238 |
error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives |
10239 |
include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the |
10240 |
`format' function. |
10241 |
|
10242 |
*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el |
10243 |
or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file |
10244 |
whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc. |
10245 |
|
10246 |
*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain |
10247 |
either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on |
10248 |
adding one of these suffixes. |
10249 |
|
10250 |
*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE |
10251 |
which specifies the base to use when converting an integer. |
10252 |
If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used. |
10253 |
|
10254 |
We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers, |
10255 |
because that would be much more work and does not seem useful. |
10256 |
|
10257 |
*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings. |
10258 |
|
10259 |
*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally. |
10260 |
You must load the `cl' library to define it. |
10261 |
|
10262 |
*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression |
10263 |
conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this: |
10264 |
|
10265 |
(with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...) |
10266 |
|
10267 |
BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use. |
10268 |
BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer. |
10269 |
|
10270 |
*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the |
10271 |
choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or |
10272 |
restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer' |
10273 |
works using `save-current-buffer'. |
10274 |
|
10275 |
*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and |
10276 |
write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value |
10277 |
of the last form. |
10278 |
|
10279 |
*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer, |
10280 |
which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the |
10281 |
last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string) |
10282 |
as the last form. |
10283 |
|
10284 |
*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain |
10285 |
characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the |
10286 |
matches. |
10287 |
|
10288 |
For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose"). |
10289 |
|
10290 |
*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions |
10291 |
with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string. |
10292 |
Then it returns that string. |
10293 |
|
10294 |
For example, if the current buffer name is `foo', |
10295 |
|
10296 |
(with-output-to-string |
10297 |
(princ "The buffer is ") |
10298 |
(princ (buffer-name))) |
10299 |
|
10300 |
returns "The buffer is foo". |
10301 |
|
10302 |
** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters |
10303 |
is non-nil. |
10304 |
|
10305 |
These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the |
10306 |
buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte |
10307 |
characters that occupy several buffer positions each. |
10308 |
|
10309 |
*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in |
10310 |
a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four). |
10311 |
|
10312 |
Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements; |
10313 |
character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes. |
10314 |
Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer |
10315 |
position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole |
10316 |
characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to |
10317 |
(lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))). |
10318 |
|
10319 |
ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always. |
10320 |
Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent |
10321 |
non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte |
10322 |
characters". |
10323 |
|
10324 |
The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128 |
10325 |
through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called |
10326 |
"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the |
10327 |
range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the |
10328 |
leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is. |
10329 |
|
10330 |
*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore |
10331 |
(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a |
10332 |
multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a |
10333 |
character, which may be more than one buffer position. |
10334 |
|
10335 |
This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is |
10336 |
always one buffer position, need to be changed. |
10337 |
|
10338 |
However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position. |
10339 |
|
10340 |
*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters, |
10341 |
because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters |
10342 |
have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However, |
10343 |
the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters, |
10344 |
guaranteed. |
10345 |
|
10346 |
*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is |
10347 |
between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a |
10348 |
character). |
10349 |
|
10350 |
When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS: |
10351 |
|
10352 |
0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range, |
10353 |
1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form, |
10354 |
2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form, |
10355 |
3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form, |
10356 |
4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character. |
10357 |
|
10358 |
*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses. |
10359 |
|
10360 |
*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function |
10361 |
`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be |
10362 |
more than the number of characters. |
10363 |
|
10364 |
You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing |
10365 |
it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape, |
10366 |
\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which |
10367 |
is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to |
10368 |
follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and |
10369 |
newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape. |
10370 |
|
10371 |
*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters |
10372 |
and returns a string containing those characters. |
10373 |
|
10374 |
*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string. |
10375 |
(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX |
10376 |
counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a |
10377 |
character, sref signals an error. |
10378 |
|
10379 |
*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters |
10380 |
in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the |
10381 |
string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). |
10382 |
|
10383 |
*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters |
10384 |
in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the |
10385 |
region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). |
10386 |
|
10387 |
*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of |
10388 |
the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string |
10389 |
to a vector of the characters in it. |
10390 |
|
10391 |
*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents |
10392 |
of a string. You call it as follows: |
10393 |
|
10394 |
(store-substring STRING IDX OBJ) |
10395 |
|
10396 |
This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in |
10397 |
STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string. |
10398 |
This function really does alter the contents of STRING. |
10399 |
Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string, |
10400 |
it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length. |
10401 |
|
10402 |
*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR, |
10403 |
if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. |
10404 |
|
10405 |
*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING, |
10406 |
if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. |
10407 |
|
10408 |
*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary, |
10409 |
to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does |
10410 |
not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string |
10411 |
which contains all or just part of the existing string.) |
10412 |
|
10413 |
(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING) |
10414 |
|
10415 |
This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN. |
10416 |
|
10417 |
The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column. |
10418 |
If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string |
10419 |
are not included in the resulting value. |
10420 |
|
10421 |
The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added |
10422 |
at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly |
10423 |
WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING |
10424 |
is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING. |
10425 |
|
10426 |
If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean |
10427 |
place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one |
10428 |
character extends across that column), then the padding character |
10429 |
PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result |
10430 |
string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at |
10431 |
column START-COLUMN. |
10432 |
|
10433 |
*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called, |
10434 |
the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not |
10435 |
necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the |
10436 |
difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the |
10437 |
changed text, before the change. |
10438 |
|
10439 |
*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character |
10440 |
sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is |
10441 |
one character set for each script, not for each language. |
10442 |
|
10443 |
**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name. |
10444 |
|
10445 |
**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names. |
10446 |
|
10447 |
**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character |
10448 |
set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.) |
10449 |
|
10450 |
**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the |
10451 |
name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values |
10452 |
which identify the character within that character set. |
10453 |
|
10454 |
**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent |
10455 |
byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the |
10456 |
opposite of split-char. |
10457 |
|
10458 |
**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets |
10459 |
of all the characters between BEG and END. |
10460 |
|
10461 |
**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets |
10462 |
of all the characters in a string. |
10463 |
|
10464 |
*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems |
10465 |
and specifying coding systems. |
10466 |
|
10467 |
**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding |
10468 |
system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list |
10469 |
of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants. |
10470 |
(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix |
10471 |
and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well |
10472 |
as what to do about code conversion.) |
10473 |
|
10474 |
**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system |
10475 |
name. It returns t if so, nil if not. |
10476 |
|
10477 |
**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use |
10478 |
for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist, |
10479 |
except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name. |
10480 |
|
10481 |
Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines |
10482 |
which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp |
10483 |
to match against a file name. |
10484 |
|
10485 |
VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or |
10486 |
a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both |
10487 |
decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent |
10488 |
to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding |
10489 |
systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr |
10490 |
specifies the coding system for encoding. |
10491 |
|
10492 |
If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system |
10493 |
or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. |
10494 |
|
10495 |
**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies |
10496 |
the coding system to use for network sockets. |
10497 |
|
10498 |
Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines |
10499 |
which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be |
10500 |
either a port number or a regular expression matching some network |
10501 |
service names. |
10502 |
|
10503 |
VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or |
10504 |
a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both |
10505 |
decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent |
10506 |
to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding |
10507 |
systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr |
10508 |
specifies the coding system for encoding. |
10509 |
|
10510 |
If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system |
10511 |
or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. |
10512 |
|
10513 |
**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use |
10514 |
for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist, |
10515 |
except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to |
10516 |
start the subprocess. |
10517 |
|
10518 |
**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding |
10519 |
systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output, |
10520 |
when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell |
10521 |
(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output |
10522 |
to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it. |
10523 |
|
10524 |
**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the |
10525 |
coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous |
10526 |
subprocess. |
10527 |
|
10528 |
It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection, |
10529 |
but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you |
10530 |
start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or |
10531 |
connection permanently or until overridden. |
10532 |
|
10533 |
The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over |
10534 |
file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and |
10535 |
network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a |
10536 |
coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil. |
10537 |
It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding |
10538 |
system for one operation at a time. |
10539 |
|
10540 |
**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from |
10541 |
files, subprocesses or network connections. |
10542 |
|
10543 |
**** The function process-coding-system tells you what |
10544 |
coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using. |
10545 |
The value is a cons cell, |
10546 |
(DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM) |
10547 |
where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from |
10548 |
the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding |
10549 |
input to the subprocess. |
10550 |
|
10551 |
**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to |
10552 |
change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess. |
10553 |
|
10554 |
** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many |
10555 |
customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility, |
10556 |
you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom. |
10557 |
|
10558 |
You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option |
10559 |
variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of |
10560 |
information (usually): the "type" which says what values are |
10561 |
legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for |
10562 |
customization. |
10563 |
|
10564 |
Thus, instead of writing |
10565 |
|
10566 |
(defvar foo-blurgoze nil |
10567 |
"*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.") |
10568 |
|
10569 |
you would now write this: |
10570 |
|
10571 |
(defcustom foo-blurgoze nil |
10572 |
"*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely." |
10573 |
:type 'boolean |
10574 |
:group foo) |
10575 |
|
10576 |
The type `boolean' means that this variable has only |
10577 |
two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values |
10578 |
describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom |
10579 |
for a description of them. |
10580 |
|
10581 |
The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option |
10582 |
should belong to. You define a new group like this: |
10583 |
|
10584 |
(defgroup ispell nil |
10585 |
"Spell checking using Ispell." |
10586 |
:group 'processes) |
10587 |
|
10588 |
The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root |
10589 |
group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself, |
10590 |
but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond |
10591 |
to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come |
10592 |
second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages. |
10593 |
|
10594 |
Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple |
10595 |
package should have just one group; a more complex package should |
10596 |
have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a |
10597 |
package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword" |
10598 |
first-level subgroups. |
10599 |
|
10600 |
** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers. |
10601 |
|
10602 |
This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a |
10603 |
separate manual that accompanies Emacs. |
10604 |
|
10605 |
** easy-mmode |
10606 |
|
10607 |
The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make |
10608 |
developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code |
10609 |
only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles, |
10610 |
predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro |
10611 |
`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also |
10612 |
`easy-mmode-define-keymap'. |
10613 |
|
10614 |
** Text property changes |
10615 |
|
10616 |
*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a |
10617 |
text property. |
10618 |
|
10619 |
*** The new functions next-char-property-change and |
10620 |
previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a |
10621 |
place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The |
10622 |
functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the |
10623 |
starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan. |
10624 |
|
10625 |
If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If |
10626 |
LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part |
10627 |
of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the |
10628 |
position of the beginning or end of the buffer. |
10629 |
|
10630 |
*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property |
10631 |
value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This |
10632 |
is an alternative to using the keymap itself. |
10633 |
|
10634 |
** Changes in invisibility features |
10635 |
|
10636 |
*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are |
10637 |
hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match |
10638 |
is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay |
10639 |
should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that |
10640 |
would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should |
10641 |
make the overlay visible. |
10642 |
|
10643 |
During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the |
10644 |
invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are |
10645 |
needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary |
10646 |
which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is |
10647 |
the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and |
10648 |
t when it should hide it. |
10649 |
|
10650 |
*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec |
10651 |
|
10652 |
Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the |
10653 |
invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol) |
10654 |
and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol. |
10655 |
Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to |
10656 |
manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'. |
10657 |
Here is an example of how to do this: |
10658 |
|
10659 |
;; If we want to display an ellipsis: |
10660 |
(add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) |
10661 |
;; If you don't want ellipsis: |
10662 |
(add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) |
10663 |
|
10664 |
... |
10665 |
(overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol) |
10666 |
|
10667 |
... |
10668 |
;; When done with the overlays: |
10669 |
(remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) |
10670 |
;; Or respectively: |
10671 |
(remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) |
10672 |
|
10673 |
** Changes in syntax parsing. |
10674 |
|
10675 |
*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as |
10676 |
`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now |
10677 |
obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable |
10678 |
`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil. |
10679 |
|
10680 |
If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior |
10681 |
is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always |
10682 |
used to determine the syntax of the character at the position. |
10683 |
|
10684 |
When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a |
10685 |
character in the buffer is calculated thus: |
10686 |
|
10687 |
a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character |
10688 |
is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type; |
10689 |
|
10690 |
Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid |
10691 |
syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e., |
10692 |
a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR). |
10693 |
|
10694 |
b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property |
10695 |
is a syntax table, this syntax table is used |
10696 |
(instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to |
10697 |
determine the syntax type of the character. |
10698 |
|
10699 |
c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table |
10700 |
of the current buffer. |
10701 |
|
10702 |
*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the |
10703 |
value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as |
10704 |
for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions. |
10705 |
|
10706 |
*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14 |
10707 |
and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended |
10708 |
only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A |
10709 |
character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by |
10710 |
another character with the same code (unless quoted). |
10711 |
|
10712 |
These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table' |
10713 |
text property. |
10714 |
|
10715 |
*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth |
10716 |
arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start |
10717 |
of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string. |
10718 |
|
10719 |
*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp' |
10720 |
(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth |
10721 |
element: the character address of the start of last comment or string; |
10722 |
nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the |
10723 |
string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code. |
10724 |
|
10725 |
*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete |
10726 |
syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports |
10727 |
`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'. |
10728 |
|
10729 |
** Changes in face features |
10730 |
|
10731 |
*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even |
10732 |
if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces. |
10733 |
|
10734 |
*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string |
10735 |
of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one). |
10736 |
|
10737 |
*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold. |
10738 |
set-face-bold-p sets that flag. |
10739 |
|
10740 |
*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic. |
10741 |
set-face-italic-p sets that flag. |
10742 |
|
10743 |
*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text |
10744 |
by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME) |
10745 |
and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in |
10746 |
the `face' property (either the character's text property or an |
10747 |
overlay property). |
10748 |
|
10749 |
This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use |
10750 |
arbitrary colors in a Lisp package. |
10751 |
|
10752 |
** Changes in file-handling functions |
10753 |
|
10754 |
*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant |
10755 |
directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words, |
10756 |
they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion |
10757 |
is now done only in substitute-in-file-name. |
10758 |
|
10759 |
This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name |
10760 |
begins with ~. |
10761 |
|
10762 |
*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file, |
10763 |
it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error. |
10764 |
|
10765 |
*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if |
10766 |
the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers. |
10767 |
|
10768 |
*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file, |
10769 |
as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil. |
10770 |
|
10771 |
*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses |
10772 |
character code conversion as well as other things. |
10773 |
|
10774 |
Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names |
10775 |
(formerly it did not). |
10776 |
|
10777 |
*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR |
10778 |
environment variable to decide which directory to put them in. |
10779 |
|
10780 |
*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps |
10781 |
instead of constant strings. |
10782 |
|
10783 |
*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used |
10784 |
to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of |
10785 |
any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through. |
10786 |
|
10787 |
substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially, |
10788 |
in the same way as before. |
10789 |
|
10790 |
*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now. |
10791 |
The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings |
10792 |
which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion. |
10793 |
|
10794 |
*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an |
10795 |
error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing |
10796 |
else, and returns nil. |
10797 |
|
10798 |
*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified |
10799 |
directory cannot be listed. |
10800 |
|
10801 |
** Changes in minibuffer input |
10802 |
|
10803 |
*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string |
10804 |
read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an |
10805 |
additional argument which specifies the default value. If this |
10806 |
argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two |
10807 |
ways: |
10808 |
|
10809 |
It is returned if the user enters empty input. |
10810 |
It is available through the history command M-n. |
10811 |
|
10812 |
*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer, |
10813 |
read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional |
10814 |
argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the |
10815 |
minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of |
10816 |
enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer. |
10817 |
|
10818 |
In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an |
10819 |
argument in this way. |
10820 |
|
10821 |
*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties |
10822 |
from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable |
10823 |
minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil. |
10824 |
|
10825 |
** Echo area features |
10826 |
|
10827 |
*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook |
10828 |
echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the |
10829 |
minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active |
10830 |
after the echo area is cleared. |
10831 |
|
10832 |
*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed |
10833 |
in the echo area, or nil if there is none. |
10834 |
|
10835 |
** Keyboard input features |
10836 |
|
10837 |
*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was |
10838 |
set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started. |
10839 |
|
10840 |
*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events |
10841 |
received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated |
10842 |
by keyboard macros. |
10843 |
|
10844 |
** Frame-related changes |
10845 |
|
10846 |
*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before |
10847 |
creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal |
10848 |
hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg. |
10849 |
|
10850 |
*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time |
10851 |
the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration |
10852 |
has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run. |
10853 |
|
10854 |
*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently |
10855 |
selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the |
10856 |
value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed |
10857 |
in the selected frame. |
10858 |
|
10859 |
*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars |
10860 |
is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies |
10861 |
which side of the window to put the scroll bars on. |
10862 |
|
10863 |
** X Windows features |
10864 |
|
10865 |
*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding |
10866 |
x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of |
10867 |
x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs. |
10868 |
|
10869 |
*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work. |
10870 |
The menu displays the current status of the box or button. |
10871 |
|
10872 |
*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument |
10873 |
MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return. |
10874 |
A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster. |
10875 |
|
10876 |
If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern, |
10877 |
it is good to supply 1 for this argument. |
10878 |
|
10879 |
** Subprocess features |
10880 |
|
10881 |
*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter |
10882 |
functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this |
10883 |
automatically. |
10884 |
|
10885 |
*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command |
10886 |
and returns the output from the command as a string. |
10887 |
|
10888 |
*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process, |
10889 |
and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection. |
10890 |
|
10891 |
** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook |
10892 |
does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before. |
10893 |
|
10894 |
** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes |
10895 |
at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it |
10896 |
goes after the other menu items. |
10897 |
|
10898 |
** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area |
10899 |
of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls |
10900 |
around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks |
10901 |
are in use. |
10902 |
|
10903 |
The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a |
10904 |
series of several changes--if that seems safe. |
10905 |
|
10906 |
Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and |
10907 |
after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls |
10908 |
form. |
10909 |
|
10910 |
** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION |
10911 |
is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense, |
10912 |
but its hook is still run. |
10913 |
|
10914 |
** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it) |
10915 |
for errors that are handled by condition-case. |
10916 |
|
10917 |
If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called |
10918 |
regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is |
10919 |
useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case. |
10920 |
|
10921 |
This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that |
10922 |
are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process |
10923 |
filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't |
10924 |
warned. |
10925 |
|
10926 |
** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own |
10927 |
way for Emacs to "ring the bell". |
10928 |
|
10929 |
** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at |
10930 |
integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for |
10931 |
functions like display-time. |
10932 |
|
10933 |
** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file |
10934 |
name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before. |
10935 |
|
10936 |
** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that |
10937 |
can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode |
10938 |
is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit. |
10939 |
|
10940 |
** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code |
10941 |
if there is an error in compilation. |
10942 |
|
10943 |
** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and |
10944 |
switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional |
10945 |
argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil, |
10946 |
they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list. |
10947 |
|
10948 |
** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty, |
10949 |
Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing |
10950 |
the *scratch* buffer. |
10951 |
|
10952 |
** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string. |
10953 |
The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used |
10954 |
where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important, |
10955 |
e.g., in Font Lock mode. |
10956 |
|
10957 |
** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer, |
10958 |
and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window. |
10959 |
It starts at 0 when the buffer is created. |
10960 |
|
10961 |
** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message |
10962 |
using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the |
10963 |
variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window |
10964 |
and compose-mail-other-frame. |
10965 |
|
10966 |
** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which |
10967 |
can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The |
10968 |
full name of the specified user will be returned. |
10969 |
|
10970 |
** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort |
10971 |
of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding |
10972 |
where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found |
10973 |
in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q |
10974 |
option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization |
10975 |
files at all. |
10976 |
|
10977 |
** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width |
10978 |
and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field |
10979 |
width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start |
10980 |
the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros. |
10981 |
|
10982 |
For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the |
10983 |
minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad |
10984 |
with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that |
10985 |
is how %S normally pads to two positions. |
10986 |
|
10987 |
** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url. |
10988 |
|
10989 |
** imenu.el changes. |
10990 |
|
10991 |
You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an |
10992 |
item from menu created by imenu. |
10993 |
|
10994 |
An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the |
10995 |
#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we |
10996 |
select one of those items. |
10997 |
|
10998 |
* For older news, see the file ONEWS |
10999 |
|
11000 |
---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
11001 |
Copyright information: |
11002 |
|
11003 |
Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
11004 |
|
11005 |
Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies |
11006 |
of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the |
11007 |
copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved, |
11008 |
thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn. |
11009 |
|
11010 |
Permission is granted to distribute modified versions |
11011 |
of this document, or of portions of it, |
11012 |
under the above conditions, provided also that they |
11013 |
carry prominent notices stating who last changed them. |
11014 |
|
11015 |
Local variables: |
11016 |
mode: outline |
11017 |
paragraph-separate: "[ ]*$" |
11018 |
end: |